JP7274192B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, and is particularly applicable to pachinko gaming machines and the like.

In a conventional game machine, a big win game is executed by performing a win/loss determination with a predetermined big win probability based on a ball entering a starting hole and opening a big win hole when the result of the win/deny determination is a big win. Then, there is a game clerk or the like that has a probability setting function to change the probability of a big hit by performing a predetermined operation on the game machine (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 10-57583

On the other hand, when the amount of profit given to the player is far from the expected amount, the setting of the gaming machine may be checked. Also, if the cause is that the setting of the game machine is not intended, it may be simply that the probability setter on the side of the game store has set it by mistake (to a probability different from the plan), or , it is necessary to check whether the cheater set the probability incorrectly. However, since it is not known when the setting of the jackpot probability was changed, it takes a great deal of effort to check security cameras and the like. Moreover, if such fraudulent acts are committed, both the gaming parlor and the players will be disadvantaged, and there is a risk that the number of players will decrease and the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease.

In addition, there is a game machine that has a movable object that operates to indicate the possibility of executing a big win game or that operates according to the variation display of symbols, and the movable object is reliably positioned at a specific position of the game machine. For this reason, some game machines are initialized when the power is turned on.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a fair gaming machine by clarifying the setting of the determination probability in a gaming machine equipped with a determination probability setting function.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems,
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
a special game execution means for performing a special game advantageous to the player by stop-displaying the identification information in a specific mode when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a determination probability that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability setting means for setting the determination probability in a state in which the determination probability can be set;
and a power supply means for supplying power,
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
a game state information initialization means for erasing the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power, and for not restoring the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; ,
a game profit giving means for giving a predetermined amount of game profit based on the establishment of a specific condition;
a game information display unit capable of displaying predetermined game information;
with
The determination probability setting means is
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, it is possible to set the determination probability,
When the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started, the judgment probability is not settable,
The game information display unit
The first period displays information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means in a state in which the determination probability can be set, and the second period after the first period displays the allocation ratio of the game profit in the specific period. display information
It is characterized by

According to such a game machine, the game state information including the information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") is stored and retained even after the power supply is stopped. We are prepared. Then, when power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is erased, and the determination probability is settable on condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. (setting of determination probability by determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means and the game is started, the transition to the state in which the determination probability can be set is disabled.

Thus, in order to shift to a state in which the determination probability can be set, it is necessary to initialize the game state, and the game state at the start of the game when setting the determination probability is set to the initial state. becomes possible. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to clarify the setting of the determination probability and to provide a fair gaming machine.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view showing the configuration of the game board of the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the gaming machine. 3 is a block diagram of a power supply board and the like; FIG. It is a table showing the correspondence between types of winnings and opening patterns of the big winning openings. (A) is a table showing random numbers related to special symbols acquired by the game control microcomputer, (B) is a table showing random numbers related to normal symbols acquired by the game control microcomputer, and (C) is a reach determination table. Yes, (D) is a normal symbol hit determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a table showing a big hit determination table for each game mode. It is a table showing the jackpot probability and the like for each game mode. It is a table|surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. 4 is a flowchart of main control main processing; 6 is a flowchart of initial setting processing; 6 is a flowchart of mode setting processing; 9 is a flowchart of mode confirmation processing; 7 is a flowchart of power-on notification processing; 4 is a flowchart of interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart of base display processing; It is a flow chart of a starting port sensor detection process. It is a flow chart of normal figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol standby processing. It is a flow chart of normal symbol suitability determination processing. It is a flowchart of normal symbol random number shift processing. It is a flow chart of processing during normal design fluctuation. It is a flow chart of normal design decision processing. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessories processing. It is a flowchart of special figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 propriety determination process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 propriety determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of special design decision processing. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors processing 1 (jackpot game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors processing 2 (small hit game). 9 is a flowchart of specific area sensor detection processing; It is a flow chart of the process at the time of starting ball entry. 7 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing; 9 is a flowchart of mode setting monitoring processing; 9 is a flowchart of sub-control main processing; 4 is a flowchart of initial processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart of processing when no setting change is made; FIG. It is a timing chart in initial processing. It is a figure which shows setting alerting|reporting and board movable initial operation. 10 is a flowchart of initial processing of another aspect 1; 10 is a flowchart of initial processing of another aspect 2; It is a timing chart in the initial processing of another aspect. 10 is a flowchart of mode setting processing according to the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a block diagram of a power supply board and the like of Example 3; FIG. 11 is a flowchart of mode setting processing according to the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of mode setting processing according to the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of power-on notification processing according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram of a power supply board and the like of Example 5; 14 is a flowchart of main control main processing of Example 5. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of mode setting processing according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 16 is a flowchart of setting storage unit determination processing according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a flowchart of base storage unit determination processing of Example 5. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing according to the fifth embodiment;

Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following description, when the winning symbols are stopped and displayed following the end of the variable display of the symbols, a pachinko machine capable of executing a winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profits (for example, prize balls) to the player will be described. , an example to which the present invention is applied.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 mounted inside the game machine frame 50. The game board 2 is a game machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50 . FIG. 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50 . The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for mounting the game board 2, etc., and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko game machine 1 on island facilities of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52 and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported at one end and configured to be openable and closable.

In addition, the front frame 51 has a shooting handle 60 for shooting game balls with a shooting intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotational angle) of the player, and can store game balls and supply the stored game balls to the shooting device side. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61 are provided. Also, on the front frame 51, a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (these two effect buttons are collectively referred to as a (also simply referred to as "effect button 63") is provided. A plurality of production buttons can be selectively used depending on the type of game production.

The front frame 51 is provided with a movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) and a speaker 67, and the movable decorative member 17 is provided with a frame lamp 66 for decoration. The movable general decorative member 17 is rotationally driven (with the back surface direction of the frame lamp 66 as a rotation axis) as the game effect progresses, and the frame lamp 66 lights in a predetermined lighting mode. Also, this movable decorative member 17 operates when a game effect (effect pattern variation effect) with a relatively high possibility of executing a big hit is executed. In addition, the frame lamp 66 may indicate the possibility of a big win depending on its lighting mode. In addition, the movable decorative member 17 also operates in a predetermined operation mode during a big win or in the case of an initial operation, which will be described later. Incidentally, the configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the mode of the present embodiment 1, as long as it can detect the input from the player, or input detection means (for example, , appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects the proximity of a part of the player's body and performs input. good. The game board 2 is surrounded by a rail member 4 and formed with a game area 3 in which game balls shot by operating a shooting handle 60 flow down. In addition, the game board 2 is provided with board surface lamps 5 for decoration. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding game balls are projected. In addition, a ball return preventing piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4 to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

An image display device 7 made of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3 . A display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with a production pattern display area 7b (also referred to as a "production pattern display section") in which production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as a "production pattern 8") are displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, which will be described later. The effect pattern display area 7b is composed of, for example, three pattern display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". A symbol 8C is displayed, and a right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area.

Each of the production patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R consists of a plurality of patterns (identification information) representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. Displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a (also referred to as "first special symbol display unit") described later (see FIG. 4) by the left, middle, and right performance symbols that are stop-displayed in the performance symbol display area 7b. The result of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit") (that is, the special symbol propriety determination (Simply referred to as the "appropriate determination") is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. Incidentally, any one of the first special design, the second special design, and the performance design may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information".

For example, when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a big hit, it is possible to stop and display the performance symbols with the same three-digit number such as ``777'' (also referred to as ``hit performance symbols''). In addition, in the event of a small hit, it is possible to stop and display the production pattern with a preset chance pattern such as "135" or a dedicated pattern such as "3*3" (also called "small hit production pattern"). is. In addition, in the case of being out, at least one of the three patterns such as "637" and "373" is different. It is possible.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the stop-displayed effect symbols. In other words, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol suitability determination by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b, but rather the effect The performance symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b are seen and grasped. The positions of the left, middle, and right pattern display areas do not need to be provided separately, and the display areas for the left, middle, and right performance patterns may each be the entire pattern display area (the performance pattern display area 7b). . In addition, as a form of variable display of the effect symbols, for example, there is a form of scroll display in vertical, horizontal, diagonal directions, and the like.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game production using the above-mentioned production patterns (production pattern game production), the winning game production executed in conjunction with the winning game, the customer waiting A demo will be displayed. In addition, in the performance pattern game performance, the winning game performance, and the demonstration performance, in addition to performance symbols such as numbers, performance images other than performance symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed.

In addition, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect pending display area 9c (first effect pending display portion) for displaying the first effect pending 9a according to the number of stored first special figure pending described later. , and a second effect pending display area 9d (second effect pending display portion) for displaying the second effect pending 9b according to the number of stored second special figure pending, which will be described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first effect suspension or the second effect suspension, the number of memories of the first special figure suspension and the second special The memory number of the second special figure reservation displayed on the figure reservation display 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

A center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect pattern display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll is provided at the lower portion of the center decorative body 10 . A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left side of the center decorative body 10 . The warp part 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, receives the game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp entrance, discharges the game ball from the warp exit and guides it to the stage part 11 . A game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 is more likely than a game ball not guided to the stage portion 11 to enter a first start port 20, which will be described later. Furthermore, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13, which has an electric decorative member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED and can be turned on according to the game state, is arranged in the shape of letters, figures, or the like. there is

A movable decorative member 14 is provided above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 so as to be movable along with the game performance. In FIG. 3, only a portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. The decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of it is visible.

As a result, the player's sense of anticipation for winning is heightened. Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, there is provided a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease with which a game ball enters. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, the suitability determination related to the first special symbol (first special symbol suitability Judgment) is executed, and the first special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the success/failure determination.

Below the first starter opening 20, a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a "variable starter opening") having a variable second starter opening 21 that changes the ease with which a game ball enters is provided. . Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for special symbol suitability determination is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, the suitability determination of the second special symbol (second special symbol suitability determination ) is executed, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and is stop-displayed based on the result of the win/loss determination. The variable winning device 22 has a movable member 23 and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23 .

By this opening and closing operation, the second starting port 21 can change from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which the possibility of entering a game ball is higher than that in the first mode. be. The movable member 23 is driven by a second starting solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows a game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in an open state, and makes it impossible for a game ball to enter when the movable member 23 is in a closed state. there is In addition, if the second starting port 21 is such that the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, it is completely closed when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It does not have to be something that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

On the right side of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, a first big winning device 31 (also referred to as "first variable ball entry") having a first big winning hole 30 is provided. The first big prize winning device 31 has an opening/closing member 32 and opens and closes the first big prize winning port 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32 . The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a first big winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the first big winning hole 30 only when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state. That is, the first variable ball entrance 31 is in a state where a game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state where a game ball can enter (open state) by opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 32. can be changed to

In addition, a second big winning device 36 having a second big winning hole 35 ("second variable ball entrance ) is provided. The second big prize winning device 36 has an opening/closing member (wing member) 37 and opens and closes the second big prize opening 35 by operating the opening/closing member 37 . The opening/closing member 37 is driven by a second prize winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). A game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 only when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state. That is, the second variable ball entrance 36 is in a state where a game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a state where a game ball can enter (open state) by opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 37. can be changed to

In addition, the second big winning device 36 specifies a specific area 39 and a non-specific area 49 through which a game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 35 can pass, and a game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 35. It includes a movable piece 150 for guiding (distributing) to the area 39 or the non-specific area 49 . The movable piece 150 is driven by a movable piece solenoid 151 (see FIG. 5). Action is started. When the movable piece solenoid 151 is OFF, i.e., when the movable piece 150 is not operating (non-operating state), the game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 is guided to the non-specific region 49, and is guided to the specific region. It becomes impossible to pass through 39.

On the other hand, when the movable piece solenoid 151 is ON, i.e., when the movable piece 150 is operating (operating state), the game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 is guided to the specific area 39, and is guided to the specific area. 39 can be passed. In the pachinko game machine 1, a high probability state, which will be described later, is generated based on detection that at least one of the game balls entering the second big prize hole 35 has passed through the specific area 39. . That is, the specific area 39 is a probability variable operation opening. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first big winning device 31 .

A gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which a game ball can pass is provided in the right side area of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3 . Based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is determined is acquired, and when a predetermined condition is established, a normal determination is made as to whether or not the second start port 21 is to be opened. While the symbol suitability determination is executed, the normal symbols are variably displayed, and are stopped and displayed based on the results of the normal symbol suitability determination. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second starting port 21 is opened.

Furthermore, a plurality of general ball entrances 27 are provided at the bottom of the game area 3 . In this way, the game areas 3 where various ball entrances and the like are arranged are the left game area (first game area) 3A and the right game area (second game area) 3B from the center in the horizontal direction. , can be divided into A hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called left hitting, and a hitting method of shooting a game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. . In this pachinko game machine 1, when the game is started, the ball is aimed to enter the first start hole 20 by striking to the left. On the other hand, when the game state changes due to winning in the win/loss determination based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20, the gate 28, the second starting hole 21, the first big winning hole 30, and the second winning hole are hit to the right. The ball is aimed to enter the big winning hole 35 . Then, when the game ball enters the first starting hole, the second starting hole, the first big winning hole, the second big winning hole, and the general ball entering hole, it is determined in advance at each ball entering hole A number of game balls (also called “prize balls”) are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board 2. As shown in FIG. The main display device 40 includes a first special symbol display unit 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variably displaying and statically displaying the first special symbol, and a second special symbol display for variably displaying and statically displaying the second special symbol. A device 41b (second special symbol display portion), and a normal symbol display device 42 (normal symbol display portion) that variably displays and stop-displays normal symbols are included. In addition, on the main display 40, the first special symbol reservation display 43a that displays the number of storage of the right or wrong determination information (first special symbol reservation) related to the first special symbol, the right or wrong determination information related to the second special symbol (second 2 special figure suspension) 2nd special figure suspension display 43b that displays the number of memories, and the normal figure suspension display 44 that displays the number of memories of the operation suspension (normal figure suspension) of the normal design display 42 ing.

In addition, on the main display 40, a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol suitability determination or the second special symbol suitability determination has been hit (specific result), the first special symbol suitability determination or the second A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is a hit, a game state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a game ball is shot. A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate direction, i.e., whether to hit right or left. Various display devices included in the main display device 40 are display-controlled by a main control unit, which will be described later.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 as a trigger. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 as a trigger. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as special symbols. Also, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as the special symbol display unit 41. FIG. Also, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure reservation display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time and then stopped, and the ball is entered into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 according to the special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed. The result of the lottery (special design success/failure determination, jackpot lottery) based on is notified. The special symbol to be stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from among a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol suitability determination. When the stop pattern is a predetermined specific special pattern (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit pattern or a small hit pattern), the second in the open pattern according to the type of the specific special pattern that is stopped and displayed. A special game (big win game, small win game) for opening the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 is performed. The pattern of opening the big winning holes (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display device 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol propriety determination. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol propriety determination is the first result (15R jackpot), three LEDs of "ijn" are lit and the rest are extinguished. In addition, when the second result (2R big win) is obtained, four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. Further, when the third result (minor win) is obtained, the four LEDs of "mnop" are lit and the rest are extinguished. Moreover, when it becomes out, two LED of "lo" can be turned on, and the rest can be turned off.

Also, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ah", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol suitability determination. As for the stop display mode, similar to the first special symbol display device 41b, different display modes are determined according to the result of the second special symbol propriety determination. Also, before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined variable time. In this manner, each LED can be turned on.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information (“acquired information”) such as a random number for judging whether or not a special symbol Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored as the first special figure reservation in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, and if the ball enters the second starting port 21, the second special figure. It is stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 85b as suspension. An upper limit is set to the number of (undigested) special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. These first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also collectively referred to as "acquisition information storage means". .

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the special figure reservation means that the special symbol judgment random number etc. corresponding to the special figure reservation is judged (such as a big hit, a small hit, or a big hit type, etc.), and a special to indicate the judgment result It means to execute the variable display of the pattern. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, the variation of the special symbols Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether or not the special symbol is appropriate for the entered ball, with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

And the number of such special figure reservations is displayed on the first special figure reservation indicator 43a and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a is composed of two "uv" LEDs, and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure reservations, the first special figure It displays the number of pending. For example, if the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green), and the number of holds is 1 In the case of , the display mode can be such that the u LED is turned off and the v LED is turned on in red, such as "u□v●". Also, when the number of reservations is 2, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which the u LED is lit in red and the v LED is extinguished, such as "u●v□". In addition, when the number of reservations is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u●v●".

Also, when the number of reservations is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green, such as "u▲v▲". In addition, the second special figure pending display device 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LED according to the number of the second special figure pending, the second special figure pending It displays numbers. For example, if the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: lights up in red, ▲: lights up in green). 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

The variable display of normal symbols is performed with the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 as a trigger. In the normal symbol display device 42, after the normal symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the results of normal symbol propriety determination based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 are displayed by the stopped and displayed normal symbols (stop symbols). inform. The normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol propriety determination. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is played to open the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and normally displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol propriety determination by its lighting mode. is. For example, when the judgment result is a hit, the winning normal symbol with both LEDs lit is stopped and displayed, such as "st■" (for example, ■: lighting, □: lighting off). In addition, when the determination result is out, a non-normal symbol is displayed in which only the LED of t is lit, such as "s□t■". It should be noted that the off normal symbol is not a specific normal symbol. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbols is executed over a predetermined variable time. be.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for judging whether a normal symbol is right or wrong is acquired based on the passage of the game ball. is temporarily stored as a normal map reservation in the normal map reservation storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set to the number of normal pattern reservations that can be stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four.

The normal pattern reservation stored in the normal pattern reservation storage unit 86 is terminated when the variable display of the normal pattern based on the normal pattern reservation becomes possible. Digestion of the normal pattern reservation means that the random number for determining whether the normal pattern is appropriate or not corresponding to the normal pattern reservation is determined, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, when the variable display of normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed at the time of its passage, that is, when the variable display of normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even so, it is possible to reserve the right of normal symbol propriety judgment for the passage, with a predetermined number as the upper limit. And the number of such normal map reservations is displayed on the normal map reservation display 44 .

Specifically, the normal map hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal map reservations by lighting the LEDs according to the number of normal map reservations. be. For example, if the number of reservations is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: lights off, ●: red lights, ▲: green lights), and the number of holds is 1 In the case of , the display mode can be such that the q LED is turned off and the r LED is turned on in red, such as "q□r●". In addition, the number of reservations 2 to 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure reservation display 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 (also referred to as a "main control unit", a "game control unit") that performs control related to game profits such as special symbol success/failure determination, normal symbol success/failure determination, and game state transition. ”), a sub-control board 90 (also referred to as a “sub-control unit”, also referred to as a “production control unit”) that performs control related to the performance executed with the progress of the game, payout control that performs control related to the payout of the game ball Substrate 110 (also referred to as "payout control unit"), effect pattern 8 displayed on image display device 7, pattern displayed on effect display device 102, first effect pending display device 103a, second effect pending display device 103b, etc. and an image control board 100 (also referred to as an “image control unit”) for performing display control. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board housing case containing a main control board 80 is provided at substantially the center of the rear surface side (rear side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and above the main control board case is a main control board housing case. is provided with a storage case for image control boards, etc., in which the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 are stored, and a sub control board storage case, in which the sub control board 90 is stored, is provided on the storage case for the image control boards, etc. A case is provided. A payout control board case for housing a payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power board case for housing a power board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

The main control board 80 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM storing programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU executing the programs stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached. In the RAM of the game control microcomputer 81, the above-mentioned special figure reservation storage unit 85 (first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and second special figure reservation storage unit 85b), general figure reservation storage unit 86, power supply voltage drop A backup area 161 (also called "main control backup area") for storing and holding information indicating the game state at that time (also called "game state information") when it is detected (when a power cutoff occurs) is provided. there is In addition, the backup area 161 is a save area for storing and holding predetermined game state information to be backed up among the information stored in the RAM of the main control unit 80 for a predetermined period even after the power supply is stopped. is. Then, when the power supply is restarted, based on the game state information stored and held in the backup area 161, it is possible to restore (restorate) the predetermined game state when the drop in the power supply voltage is detected. . These processes are also called "game state information recovery means".

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main control board 80 has the probability of determining that it is a big hit in the first special symbol success determination and the second special symbol success determination, the probability of determining that it is a small hit, and the probability of determining that it is a big hit. A "mode setting switch 82" is provided which can externally change the probability of judging the type of jackpot in the case of judging by a predetermined input operation. As shown in FIG. 6, this "mode setting switch 82" is a slide type switch capable of switching settings in five steps. Also, a game clerk or the like (mode setter, probability setter) slides the operation portion 82a of the mode setting switch 82 leftward or rightward (performs a predetermined input operation) under specific conditions to be described later. By), it is possible to select any game mode. In FIG. 6, it is assumed that the operation unit 82a is positioned to select "game mode 3" and the game mode is set to "game mode 3".

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to select an arbitrary game mode from five kinds of game modes by performing an input operation to the mode setting switch 82 . A game mode 1, a game mode 2, a game mode 3, a game mode 4, and a game mode 5 are provided as five kinds of game modes. Then, in FIG. 6, the game mode can be set to game mode 1 by positioning the operating portion 82a at the leftmost setting position ([1] position) of the mode setting switch 82. FIG. Also, by positioning the operating portion 82a to the second setting position ([2] position) from the left of the mode setting switch 82, it is possible to set the game mode to the game mode 2. In addition, by positioning the operating portion 82a to the third setting position ([3] position) from the left of the mode setting switch 82, it is possible to set the game mode to the game mode 3 (FIG. 6). setting mode). Also, by positioning the operating portion 82a to the second setting position ([4] position) from the right of the mode setting switch 82, it is possible to set the game mode to the game mode 4. In addition, by positioning the operation unit 82a to the right end setting position ([5] position) of the mode setting switch 82, it is possible to set the game mode to the game mode 5 (see FIG. 6). .

Further, by moving (positioning) the operation portion 82a of the mode setting switch 82 to an arbitrary setting position, the game mode can be set to an arbitrary game mode by the setter. The setting state of the mode setting switch 82, that is, the position of the operating portion 82a is monitored by the CPU of the main control board 80, and the position of the operating portion 82a of the mode setting switch 82 (selected by the operator) is monitored by the CPU. (Selection information indicating the selected game mode) is recognized. Then, when an operator such as a game clerk performs a predetermined input operation on the mode setting switch 82 to change the game mode, and the selection information is changed, the CPU of the main control board 80 performs a predetermined operation described later. Determines whether the change conditions are met (determines whether an operation has been performed under specific conditions), and if so, sets the game mode corresponding to the selected information (changes the mode), and satisfies If not, the game mode corresponding to the selection information is not set (the mode is not changed). When this change condition is provided, the means for setting the game mode (changing the setting) is also referred to as "determination probability setting means". In addition, the mode setting switch 82 (including the operation unit 82a, etc.) is also referred to as "determination probability selection means", and information indicating the position (selected setting) selected by the mode setting switch 82 is "selection information". Also called

Here, each game mode (game mode 1 to game mode 5) will be described with reference to FIG. When the game mode is set to "game mode 1", the jackpot probability (probability of being determined to be a big hit in the first special symbol success/failure determination, and probability of being determined to be a big hit in the second special symbol success/failure determination) is low. It is 1/630 in the probability state (normal state) and 1/63 in the high probability state. Also, the small hit probability is set to 1/160 for both the first special symbol right/wrong determination and the second special symbol right/wrong determination. In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot type determination) when the first special symbol win is determined is 40% for the 15R first jackpot, 50% for the 15R second jackpot, and 10% for the 2R third jackpot. are divided by The random number for determining the jackpot type is composed of 100 values from 0 to 99, and any value is acquired at the timing of entering the start port (first start port or second start port), and depending on the acquired value A jackpot type is determined. In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot type decision determination) when the second special symbol success/failure judgment results in a 100% ratio of the 15R fourth jackpot. That is, when it is determined to be a big hit in the second special symbol success/failure determination, it always becomes a 15R fourth big hit. Incidentally, the jackpot probability is also referred to as "determination probability".

Next, when the game mode is set to "game mode 2", the probability of a big hit (probability of being determined as a big hit in the first special symbol success/failure determination, and probability of being determined as a big hit in the second special symbol success/failure determination) is 1/315 in the low-probability state (normal state) and 1/63 in the high-probability state. Other conditions are the same as in game mode 1. Next, when the game mode is set to "game mode 3", the jackpot probability (probability of being determined to be a big hit in the first special symbol success/failure determination, and probability of being determined to be a big hit in the second special symbol success/failure determination) is 1/210 in the low-probability state (normal state) and 1/63 in the high-probability state. Other conditions are the same as in game mode 1. When these game modes 1 to 3 are compared, the probability of a big hit in a low probability state (probability of a so-called first hit) is different. is advantageous, and the game mode 3 is the most disadvantageous game mode for the player.

Next, when the game mode is set to "game mode 4", the probability of a big hit (probability of being determined as a big hit in the first special symbol success/failure determination, and probability of being determined as a big hit in the second special symbol success/failure determination) is 1/315 in the low-probability state (normal state) and 1/42 in the high-probability state. Also, the small hit probability is set to 1/90 for both the first special symbol success/failure determination and the second special symbol success/failure determination. In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot type determination) when the first special symbol win is determined is 30% for the 15R first jackpot, 60% for the 15R second jackpot, and 10% for the 2R third jackpot. are divided by In this game mode 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is the same as in the game mode 2, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/42, and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is the highest among the game modes. It is As will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment performs a predetermined number of special symbol success/failure determinations in the high probability state, and if it is not determined to be a big hit, it shifts to the low probability state ( So-called "ST machine", "probability variable number cutting game machine"). Therefore, in this game mode 4, the possibility of the next big hit occurring in a high probability state is the highest compared to other game modes. That is, this game mode 4 can be said to be the setting (game mode) with the lowest possibility of ending the high probability state without generating a big hit.

On the other hand, in the determination of the jackpot type, it is set to be disadvantageous compared to other game modes. Specifically, in the jackpot type determination when it becomes a jackpot in the first special symbol propriety determination, the ratio of the 15R first jackpot with a high possibility of being given a privilege (high probability state) is higher than other game modes It is set low, and the ratio of the 15R second big hit with a low possibility of being given a privilege (high probability state) is set higher than in other game modes. Thus, in the game mode 4, the possibility that the next big win will occur in the high probability state is high, but the possibility that the high probability state will continue based on the big win is low.

Next, when the game mode is set to "game mode 5", the jackpot probability (probability of being determined to be a big hit in the first special symbol success/failure determination, and probability of being determined to be a big hit in the second special symbol success/failure determination) is 1/315 in the low-probability state (normal state) and 1/90 in the high-probability state. Also, the small hit probability is set to 1/210 for both the first special symbol suitability determination and the second special symbol suitability determination. In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot type determination) when the first special symbol win is determined is 50% for the 15R first jackpot, 40% for the 15R second jackpot, and 10% for the 2R third jackpot. are divided by In this game mode 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is the same as in the game mode 2, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/90, and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is the lowest among the game modes. It is Therefore, in this game mode 5, the possibility of the next big win occurring in the high probability state is the lowest compared to other game modes, and the possibility of ending the high probability state without causing the big win. This is the highest setting. On the other hand, in the determination of the jackpot type, it is set to be advantageous compared to other game modes. Specifically, in the jackpot type determination when it becomes a jackpot in the first special symbol propriety determination, the ratio of the 15R first jackpot with a high possibility of being given a privilege (high probability state) is higher than other game modes The ratio of the 15R second jackpot, which is set high and has a low possibility of being given a privilege (high probability state), is set lower than in other game modes. Thus, in the game mode 5, the possibility of the next big win occurring in the high probability state is low, but when the big win is achieved, the possibility of the high probability state continuing based on the big win is high. ing.

In this way, as well as having a game mode that is disadvantageous and advantageous compared to others, the possibility of a big hit occurring in a high probability state (during the privilege granting state) is high, but when a big hit occurs, the high probability state A game mode with a low probability of continuation (possibility of being granted benefits again) or a game mode with a low possibility of a jackpot in a high probability state, but a high probability that the high probability state will continue in the event of a jackpot. etc., it has a variety of game modes that can meet the tastes of a variety of players. As a result, a player who selects a gaming machine selects a predetermined gaming machine and plays a game, expecting that the gaming machine is set to the gaming mode of his/her preference. In addition, since the game modes 1 to 3, the game mode 4, and the game mode 5 have different small hit probabilities, the player counts the number of occurrences of small hits during the game, and the like. It is possible to guess to some extent the game mode being played. As a result, the player can guess whether the gaming machine being played is set to the desired game mode, and use this as an index for continuing the game. As a result, it is possible to impart new game interest and enhance game interest.

Also, in these game modes, it is possible to vary some or all of the aspects such as the displayed identification information (drawing pattern), characters that appear, reach effects (character effects), and the like. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game and improve the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. A power supply substrate 109 is provided to supply drive power to the device. The power supply board 109 is provided with a power supply unit 104 for supplying drive power to each control board and the like, and a voltage drop monitoring circuit 105 for monitoring a drop in the power supply voltage supplied to the power supply board. ing. In addition, the power supply board 109 serves as a switch for a game clerk or the like to perform a predetermined input operation. A power switch 84 that can start or stop the supply of power supply voltage, and a backup area provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 and a backup provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 110 by performing a predetermined input operation and a RAM clear switch 83 for erasing and initializing the storage contents of the area. This power supply board 109 is also called "power supply means". Moreover, the power supply board 109 may be configured by a single board, or may be configured by a plurality of boards. This is the same for the main control board 80, the payout control board 110, the sub control board 90, and other control boards.

When only the power switch 84 is turned ON in a state where power is not supplied to the pachinko game machine 1 (power OFF state), the power supply voltage is supplied to the power supply board 109, and from the power supply board 109 to various control boards. Required drive power is supplied. Then, when the game state information at the time of power OFF (at the time of power decrease) is normally stored (retained) in the backup area, based on the game state information, the game at the time of power OFF (at the time of power decrease) After recovering the state, it is set to a state in which the game can be played (this is also called "game state information recovery means"). On the other hand, when the power switch 84 is turned on, if the power switch 84 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 83 for a predetermined period, the input information (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch from the power supply board 109 is the main control. If there is game state information input to the unit 80 and the payout control unit 110 and stored in the backup area (the main control unit 80 and the payout control unit 110), the stored game state information is erased and initialized. , the game is ready to play (this is also called "game state information initialization means"). As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be initialized to the initial state.

In addition, when erasing the stored (backed up) game state information by operating the RAM clear switch, among the stored game state information, the game state information excluding specific game state information (game state information to be erased) ) may be deleted. The game state information that is not erased even by this RAM clear (initialization) operation is called "specific game state information". "Specific gaming state information" is, for example, a base value (first base value, second base value) to be described later, which can be used to check the operation status of the game machine or to be used by a third party (police, inspection agency, etc.) This is game information used when inspecting the game machine. In addition, other game state information (e.g., undistributed prize ball information, state information (probability variation, time reduction, jackpot), game mode information, error information, etc.) are erased by RAM clear (initialization) operation. .

In addition, the voltage drop monitoring circuit 105 monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC24V, DC12V, DC5V, etc.) used in the pachinko game machine 1, and the voltage value to be monitored drops to a predetermined value. Then (when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected), a "power-off signal" indicating this is output to the CPU of the main control unit 80, the CPU of the payout control unit 110, etc. (see FIG. 6) . In addition, the CPU of the main control board 80 and the CPU of the payout control board 110, which have received the power-off signal transmitted from the power supply board 109, store and hold the game state information stored in their respective RAMs in backup areas. power off monitoring process. Here, in the RAM of the main control board 80 and the RAM of the payout control board 110, the memory area for storing the game state information during the game is also called "game state information storage means", and when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, A backup area for storing game state information to be backed up is also called a "storage holding means".

Also, part or all of the RAM of the main control board 80 and the RAM of the payout control board 110 are used as a backup area, and are backed up by the backup power supply (backup voltage) of the power supply section of the power supply board 109 . That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 stops due to a power failure or power OFF operation, these RAM The content (game state information) of the backup target (memory retention target) stored in is stored (memory retention). The game state information includes at least information indicating the set game mode (game mode information), data indicating the game state (state information), that is, data corresponding to the control state of the main control unit (special symbol status Flag, normal symbol status flag, pending storage counter value, variable probability flag, time saving flag, etc.) and data indicating the number of undistributed prize balls (undistributed prize ball information).

These game state information are saved (stored) in a backup area (backup RAM) in which power supply is maintained by a backup power source. It should be noted that "data corresponding to the control state of the main control unit" means that after a power failure, etc., when the power supply is restarted, the control state (game state) will be changed. This data is necessary for restoring the control state (game state) to the time (before the power failure occurred). In addition, although not shown, the RAM of the sub-controller 90 is also provided with a backup area in the same way as the main controller 80 and the like. The number of pending memories, look-ahead information, probability variable flag, time saving flag, etc.) can be stored, and the contents of the backup area of the RAM may be saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main control board 80 is provided (mounted) with a mode setting lock portion 89 for enabling the setting change of the game mode described above. As described above, in order for the game clerk or the like to slide the operation portion 82a of the mode setting switch 82 leftward or rightward (by performing a predetermined input operation) to select an arbitrary game mode, this Operation of the mode setting lock 89 is required. Although details will be described later, at least one method is to insert a setting key (not shown) into an insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 and operate (rotate) the setting key to turn on the mode setting lock portion 89. As one condition, it is possible to change the game mode. A state in which the longitudinal direction of the insertion portion 89a is vertical (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 6) is OFF. When the setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a in this OFF state, and the setting key is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees (rotated in one direction by a predetermined amount), the longitudinal direction of the insertion portion 89a becomes horizontal (broken line in FIG. 6). ). This state is the ON state.

With this ON state as at least one condition, the game mode can be changed. The mode setting lock portion 89 is connected to the CPU of the main control portion 80 on the main control board 80, and the CPU of the main control portion 80 is in the ON state or the OFF state of the mode setting lock portion 89. Also, it is possible to determine (identify) when the mode setting lock portion 89 is turned ON, when it is turned OFF, and the like. In addition, when the mode setting lock 89 is turned ON and the setting of the game mode is changed (including cases where the setting is not changed), the setting key is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees (rotated in the other direction by a predetermined amount) to initialize. By returning to the position (OFF position), the game mode setting change operation is completed, and the game machine is brought into a "playable state" in which a player can play.

Further, in this embodiment, when a setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a, the inserted setting key cannot be removed at the ON position, and can be removed only at the OFF position. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game clerk or the like from leaving the game machine in the "unable to play" state by finishing the setting change work while the mode setting lock portion 89 is in the OFF state. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 80 is sealed (structured so that it cannot be unsealed without being destroyed) while being housed in the main control board case. Only the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 and its peripheral portion are exposed from the main control board case so that the setting key can be inserted into the insertion portion 89a from the outside of the main control board case. there is That is, the setting of the game mode can be changed in a state where the main control board case is sealed (closed). It should be noted that although the setting key can be removed from the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 only at the OFF position, it can also be inserted only at the OFF position. That is, the setting key can be inserted into and removed from the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 only at the OFF position.

Further, the main control board 80 is provided with an information display section 88 (also referred to as a "game information display section") for displaying predetermined game information at predetermined timing (during a predetermined period). ing). As shown in FIG. 6, the information display section 88 has four LED indicators (a first information display section 88a, a second information display section 88b, a third information display section 88c, and a third information display section 88c) on the main control board 80. 4 information display portions 88d) are arranged (mounted) side by side in the horizontal direction. In addition, each LED display has a 7-segment display section and a dot display section, and by controlling the display by combining these four LED displays, it is possible to perform a wide variety of displays. It has become. In addition, the information display unit 88 displays the game mode set by the above-described "determination probability setting means" or displays base values (first base value, second base value) to be described later. be. When power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the power is turned on), all the display units (LED displays) constituting the information display unit 88 are displayed in a predetermined display mode for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). For example, all of the four information display units (88a, 88b, 88c, 88d) (8 display units with 7 segments + dots) are flashed (for example, lit for 0.5 seconds, 0.5 seconds). turn off for 2 seconds). By checking the initial display mode when the power is turned on, it is possible to check whether the display units (total of 32 units) constituting the information display unit 88 are faulty or defective. Moreover, in order to facilitate confirmation, it is desirable to perform display control of the same display mode on all the display units at approximately the same timing.

It is also assumed that the information display section 88 is always in a display state for displaying some game information after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the game mode display state ("game mode change state", "game mode confirmation state") for displaying the game mode is set from when the power is turned on until the game becomes possible, and the game mode is displayed. When a game is ready, a base display state for displaying a base value, which will be described later, is entered. That is, it is assumed that no game information is displayed, that is, it is not set to an OFF state. As a result, it is possible to always display some game information according to the state of the game machine, and to grasp the game information quickly and reliably. Also, if the information display unit 88 is touched while no game information is displayed, it is possible to recognize that there is some kind of failure or malfunction in the information display unit 88, the control unit that controls the display of the information display unit 88, wiring, or the like. As a result, it is possible to quickly implement repairs and countermeasures. In addition, when (all of) a plurality of stored base values such as the first base value and the second base value are out of the reference base value range described in the game machine manual, etc., the game It is possible to inquire of the manufacturer, etc., assuming that there is some problem with the nail, game part, or the like. In addition, this can reduce the possibility of unforeseen disadvantages.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88 . Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include the out sensor 29, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, and the specific area sensor. 39a, and general entrance sensor 27a. These various sensors are also called "detection means".

The out sensor 29 is for counting the number (total number) of game balls shot to the game area, and all the game balls shot to the game area 3, that is, enter any ball entrance. It detects all of the game balls discharged out of the game machine as a result and the game balls discharged out of the game machine through the out port without entering any ball entry port. Therefore, it is provided below the out port 18 provided at the bottom of the game area 3 . Also, the out sensor may be provided on the game board 2 or may be provided on the game machine frame 50 . Based on the total number of outs (effective total number of balls fired) counted by this out sensor 29 and the number of balls entering the entrance (first start opening 20, second start opening 21, general entrance 27) Based on the calculated total number of prize balls, a base value, which will be described later, is calculated and displayed on the information display section 88 described above. Here, the counting means for counting the number of outs may be called "first counting means", and the means for counting the number of winning balls may be called "second counting means".

Further, the first starting hole sensor 20a is provided in the first starting hole 20 and detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 20. As shown in FIG. The second starting hole sensor 21a is provided in the second starting hole 21 and detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 . The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. As shown in FIG. The first big winning hole sensor 30 a is provided in the first big winning hole 30 and detects a game ball entering the first big winning hole 30 . The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided in the second big winning hole 35 and detects a game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 . The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second big winning hole 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39 out of the game balls entering the second big winning hole 35. be. The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in the non-specific area 49 in the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 49 among the game balls entering the second large winning opening 35. It is something to do. The general ball entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each general ball entrance 27 and detects a game ball entering the general ball entrance 27 .

As the solenoids, the second starting solenoid 24, the first big winning solenoid 33, the second big winning solenoid 38 and the movable piece solenoid 151 are connected. These various solenoids are also called "driving means". The second starting solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22, and the first big winning solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. be. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening/closing member 37 of the second big prize device 36 , and the movable piece solenoid 151 is for driving the movable piece 150 of the second big prize prize device 36 . be. Furthermore, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol suspension display 43a, a second special symbol suspension display 43b, and a general symbol. A holding indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game state indicator 46, a shooting direction indicator 47, and a winning indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 .

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 includes a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and rental balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1 and stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like). (which enables ball rental based on the information received) is connected, and a launcher 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a "launch control unit"). Firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) for controlling the payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 operates the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 through the input/output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls or pay out rental balls. The game balls to be put out are detected by payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the shooting device 112, the touch sensor 114 detects the player's contact with the shooting handle 60, and the shooting volume 115 changes the rotation of the shooting handle 60. Detect quantity. Then, the shooting motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is shot with strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the shooting volume 115 .

The main control board 80 also transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90 . The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 . That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as communication direction control means.

Also, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 ("effect control microcomputer") for controlling the effect of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs and the like for controlling game effects as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. there is The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards and the like via an input/output circuit 95 . The input/output circuit 95 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 91 . Also, the ROM may be externally attached.

An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 and a lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub-control board 90 . The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 ("image control microcomputer") of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Display control of the device 7, the performance display 102, the first performance suspension display 103a, and the second performance suspension display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores still image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically characters, items, graphics, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production patterns, reserved patterns, etc.). and image data such as background images are stored. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads out image data from the ROM based on commands from the performance control microcomputer 91 . Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display device 102 consists of two LEDs, and performs variable display and stop display in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the effect pattern 8, and the effect pattern is displayed by lighting/extinguishing the two LEDs or combining colors. Stop display is performed in a display mode showing the display result of No. 8 (result of special symbol propriety determination). Also, the first effect suspension display 103a and the second effect suspension display 103b are similarly composed of two LEDs. Then, by lighting/extinguishing of the two LEDs or combination of colors, the first effect pending display 103a is displayed by the pending number displayed in the first effect pending display area 9c and the first special figure pending display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same pending number as the pending number. In addition, the second effect pending display 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same pending number as the pending number displayed in the second effect pending display area 9d and the second special figure pending display 43b. be. This is done by displaying character designs on substantially the entirety of the display screen 7a (performance design display section), or by operating the movable decorative member 14 to display substantially the entire performance design display area 7b (performance design display section) of the display screen 7a. Such a display is provided because some or all of the production pattern, the first production suspension display part, or the second production suspension display part may not be visible by covering it. . A VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the one-chip microcomputer 101 for image control of the image control board 100 .

Also, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs sounds, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80 . Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 . A CPU may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the audio control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 to cause the CPU of the image control board 100 to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the sound data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100 . In addition, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the production control microcomputer 91 provides light emission pattern data (data for deciding on/off, emission color, etc.) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5. , lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board surface lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107 .

Furthermore, based on the command received from the main control board 80, the performance control microcomputer 91 drives an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 to drive the movable decorative member. 14 and 17 are activated. The movable decorative member 14 (also referred to as “board movable portion” or “first movable member”) is a movable so-called gimmick provided on the center decorative body 10 . In addition, the movable decorative member 17 (also referred to as a “frame movable portion” or a “second movable member”) is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 91. The movement pattern data for operating the movable decorative members 14 and 17 in a predetermined operation mode (also referred to as "driving data") is determined from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and the motion of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined motion pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107 , and in that case, the CPU may control the lighting of the lamp and the operation of the movable decorative member 14 . Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to light emission patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM.

An origin sensor 14b is connected to the sub-control board 90 to detect that the movable decorative member 14 is at the starting position (initial state), that is, at the origin. The origin sensor 14b constitutes a movable decorative unit together with the movable decorative member 14, and as indicated by the dashed line in FIG. Sometimes provided so that its presence can be detected. When the movable decorative member 14 is at the starting position, the signal (origin sensor signal) input from the origin sensor 14b to the sub-control board 90 is ON, and when the movable decorative member 14 is not at the starting position, the origin sensor signal is OFF. Become. The origin sensor 14b may be a sensor capable of detecting the approach of a detection object in a non-contact manner, and a photosensor, a proximity sensor, or the like can be used.

An origin sensor 17b is connected to the sub-control board 90 to detect that the movable decorative member 17 is at the starting position (initial state), that is, at the origin. The origin sensor 17b constitutes a movable decorative unit together with the movable decorative member 17, and can detect the existence of the movable decorative member 17 when it is inside (rear side) of the movable decorative member 17 and the movable decorative member 17 is at the starting position. It is provided so that When the movable decorative member 17 is at the starting position, the signal (origin sensor signal) input from the origin sensor 14b to the sub-control board 90 is ON, and when the movable decorative member 17 is not at the starting position, the origin sensor signal is OFF. Become. The origin sensor 17b may be a sensor capable of detecting the approach of a detection object without contact, and a photosensor, a proximity sensor, or the like can be used.

Also, the sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding effect button detection switch.

Next, the control related to the winning/losing determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol suitability determination, there are "big hit", "minor hit", and "off". At the time of "big hit", the special symbol display part 41 stops displaying the "big hit pattern". Further, in the case of a "small win", the special symbol display portion 41 stops and displays the "small win symbol". In addition, when "missing", the special symbol display portion 41 stops and displays "missing symbol". When it is determined as a big win or a small win, a "special game" is executed to open the first big winning hole 30 or the second big winning hole 35 in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbols stopped and displayed. . A special game executed as a big win is called a "big win game", and a special game executed as a small win is called a "small win game". As for the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed, one or a plurality of special symbols may be provided for each of "big win", "minor win", and "losing".

A plurality of types are provided for the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 7, there are "15R (round) 1st big win", "15R 2nd big win", "2R 3rd big win", and "15R 4th big win". "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 4th jackpot" have 15 openings (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35). In the second round, it is a big win to open the second big winning hole 35 in a manner that the game ball can (easily) pass through the specific area 39 (also simply referred to as "V"). A round aiming at passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 (predetermined privilege is given when the game ball passes through the specific area) can be called a V round, a chance round, or a challenge round. Note that this V round (specific round) is a round in which the movable piece 150 is operated, and the movable piece 150 is not operated in rounds other than the V round (non-specific round). That is, even in the round to open the second big winning hole 35, if it is a round other than the V round, the movable piece 150 does not operate, and the specific area 39 is always closed, even if the game is played. Even if the ball enters the second big winning hole 35, the game ball is not guided to the specific area 39. - 特許庁That is, the rounds other than the V round can be said to be "rounds in which the game ball cannot pass through the specific area".

In addition, in the "15R 2nd jackpot", although the number of times (number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) is 15 times, one round is the chance round mentioned above. The opening time of the eye and the second round is extremely short (momentary opening and closing), it is difficult to enter the second big winning hole 35, and it is difficult (impossible) to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 It is considered to be a big hit. In other words, this “15R second big win” can be said to be a big win that does not open the second big winning device 36 in a manner that allows (easy) passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 . "2R 3rd jackpot" is that the number of times (number of rounds) of opening the big prize hole (second big prize hole 35) is 2, and in the 1st and 2nd rounds, which are V rounds, It is opened in such a manner that a game ball to the second big winning hole 35 can be entered even if there is none. Specifically, in each round, one release of “0.9s” is performed. That is, the 2R third big win is a big win that opens the second big winning device 36 in such a manner that the game ball can pass through the specific area 39 . However, since the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 is 1.8 seconds even in the first round and the second round combined, it is possible to pass the game ball to the specific area 39, but the 15R first big hit The possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 is lower.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the game state after the end of the big win game is shifted to the high probability state described later based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 during the big win game. Therefore, when the result of the special symbol suitability determination is the 15R first big hit, the 2R third big hit, or the 15R fourth big hit, the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area (15R second big hit and Since the V rounds of the 1st and 2nd rounds are executed in a relatively high manner (comparatively), by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during execution of the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game can be shifted to a high-probability state. On the other hand, in the case of the 15R second jackpot, the opening time of the chance rounds of the first round and the second round is 0.1 seconds each, so although it is a V round, the second big prize opening Since it is very difficult to enter the game ball into the game ball, it is not possible to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 during the execution of the big win game, and the game state after the big win game is the normal state described later. (low-probability state) is very likely (it can be said to be a low-probability state).

On the other hand, the opening pattern of the small winning game that is executed when the small winning is achieved is to open the second big winning opening 35 twice for 0.9 seconds (entering a ball possible state). ) is assumed. The opening pattern of this small winning game is apparently the same opening pattern as the 2R third big winning game, and the opening pattern is such that it is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a small winning game or a 2R big winning game. . Therefore, it is not possible to distinguish whether the winning game to be executed is a small winning game or a 2R big winning game only by looking at these opening patterns. That is, when a small win is achieved, the second big winning device 36 is opened twice in such a manner that the game ball can enter the second big winning hole 35 . However, since the movable piece 150 does not operate during execution of the small winning game, even if the game ball enters the second big winning hole 35, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39. - 特許庁Even if the game ball passes through the specific area 39 for some reason, in rounds other than the V round, the invalid period during which the passing through the specific area 39 (detection by the specific area sensor 39a) is not processed as valid. , and no privilege is granted based on passage through the specific area 39 .

Therefore, the game state after execution of the small winning game is not changed from before execution of the small winning game. Therefore, if the game state before execution of the small-hit game is a normal state (low-probability state), the game state after execution of the small-hit game will also be in a normal state. From the player's point of view, it is difficult to distinguish between the 2R third big win and the small win even by looking at the opening pattern of the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35). That is, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the result of the special symbol right/wrong determination is the 2R third big win or the small win from the opening pattern of the big winning hole. Also, in terms of performance, during the execution of the big win game related to the 2R third big win and the small win game related to the small win, and during the subsequent variable display of the performance symbols, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the two. As shown, a common production (production mode) can be executed. Therefore, even if the game ball is passed through the specific area 39 during the special game as the 2R third big win, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the subsequent game state has shifted to the high probability state. It should be noted that the operation mode of the movable piece 150 inside the second big winning hole 35 and whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area are also structured to be difficult for the player to visually recognize. As a result, in the case of a small win or in the case of a 2R third big win, the game is played with a sense of expectation that the winning game (small win game or big win game) may be in a high probability state after the end of the game. can be progressed, and it is possible to enhance the game interest. It should be noted that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not called the number of rounds, but simply called the number of openings in the case of a small win.

More specifically, the opening patterns of the big winning openings when each big win and small win in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment are as shown in FIG. That is, when it becomes a 15R first big hit (when the 15R first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a), and when it becomes a 15R fourth big hit (on the second special symbol display device 41b 15R (when the fourth big winning pattern is stopped and displayed), the second big prize winning port 35 is opened for 28 seconds at maximum from 1R to 2R, and the first big prize winning port 30 is opened for 28 seconds at maximum from 3R to 15R. . In this hit, since the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1st round and the 2nd round is 28 seconds, it is easy to let the game ball pass through the specific area 39 during the round.

Also, in the case of a 15R second big win (when the 15R second big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the maximum value of the second big winning opening 35 is 0.1 from 1R to 2R. Seconds are opened, and from 3R to 15R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds. In this hit, the opening time of the second big winning opening 35 in the 1Rth and 2Rth is a maximum of 0.1 seconds, which is extremely short time (momentary opening and closing), so the game ball moves to the specific area 39 during the round. is almost impossible to pass. That is, the opening pattern for the 15R second jackpot differs from the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot in the first and second rounds. That is, in the 15R first jackpot, the second big winning hole 35 is opened for 28 seconds in the first and second rounds, which are V rounds, so that the game ball easily enters the second big winning hole 35 . And since the movable piece 150 is also operating, the game ball entering the second big winning hole 35 passes through the specific area 39 with a high probability. On the other hand, in the 15R second jackpot, the second big prize opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second in the first and second rounds. Therefore, it is very difficult for a game ball to enter the second big winning hole 35 . Therefore, the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 during execution of the 15R second big win is considerably lower than that of the 15R first big win. Moreover, since the possibility of the game ball passing through the specific area 39 is infinitely close to 0, it can be said that it does not pass.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, when the 2R 3rd big win is achieved (when the 2R 3rd big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the 2nd The big winning openings 35 are opened for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. In this hit, since the total opening time of the second big winning hole 35 for the 1st round and the 2nd round is a maximum of 1.8 seconds, a game ball is entered into the second big winning hole 35 during any round. It is possible to allow the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 in which the movable piece 150 operates and is in the open state. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine 1, one game ball is shot in about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the opening time of the second big winning hole 35 is 1.8 seconds, it is sufficiently possible to let the game ball enter the second big winning hole 35 . Also, in this 2R 3rd jackpot, since the total opening time of the 2nd jackpot is as short as 1.8 seconds, it is not possible to expect as many prize balls (gaming profits) as in the other 15R jackpots. In other words, it is a big hit in which almost no prize balls can be obtained as compared with other big hits (15R big hits).

In addition, when it becomes the first small hit (when the first small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a), and when it becomes the second small hit (second special symbol display device 41b 2), the second big winning opening 35 is opened twice for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. That is, the same big winning opening as the big winning opening opened in the big winning game of the 2R third big winning is opened in the same opening pattern. The closing time between the first opening and the second opening in the small winning game and the interval time between the first round and the second round in the 2R third big winning are set to the same time. As a result, it is difficult to distinguish between the big winning game related to the 2R third big winning and the small winning game related to the small winning. In addition, even in this small hit, since the total opening time of the second big winning hole 35 is 1.8 seconds at maximum, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second big winning hole 35 . However, as described above, since the small winning game does not have the V round, the movable piece 150 does not operate and the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39 . In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is as short as 1.8 seconds, this small winning does not expect as many prize balls as the 2R third big winning. In other words, the small hit has almost no benefits for the player in terms of the transition of the game state and the prize ball (only the prize ball by entering the ball). That is, in the present embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 35, the first opening pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 (easily pass) (15th big win, 15R fourth big win), A second open pattern (15R second jackpot) in which it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39, and a second open pattern in which the game ball can pass through the specific area and is less likely to pass than the first open pattern. 3 open patterns (2R third big hit, small hit).

In addition, the allocation probability to each big hit in the success/failure determination of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is set corresponding to each game mode, as described above. In addition, all the big hits in the success/failure determination of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are the 15R fourth big hits. That is, when a big hit is achieved by a hit/fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, which has become easier to enter due to the operation of the open extension function (occurrence of a high base state), which will be described later, the 15R fourth big hit is always achieved. becomes. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball enters the first start port 20 and determines whether the game ball enters the first start port 20. It is set so that the player will be more likely to win a big hit in the win/fail judgment (big hit lottery of the second special symbol) performed after the game ball enters the ball. That is, the player expects the ball to enter the second starting hole 21 and plays the game. This is particularly noticeable during the operation of the opening extension function in which the frequency of ball entry into the second starting port 21 increases.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, the judgment as to whether it is a big win, a small win, or a loss is made based on a ``random number for judging special symbol success/failure (also referred to as ``information for judging success/failure''), and a big hit has been achieved. In this case, the type of the jackpot is determined based on the "random number for determining the type of jackpot (also referred to as "random number for symbol determination" and "information for symbol determination"). Each of this special symbol propriety determination and big hit type determination is also called "property judgment (judgment)", and may be generally called "property judgment (judgment)". As shown in FIG. 8(A), the special symbol suitability determination random number takes a value in the range of 0-629. The jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of 0-99. In addition, the random number (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 includes the random number for judging the special symbol and the random number for determining the jackpot type. (also referred to as “reach information”)” and “variation pattern random numbers (also referred to as “variation pattern information”)”.

The ready-to-win random number is a random number that determines whether or not to generate a ready-to-win in a game effect (a performance symbol game effect) showing the result using a performance symbol when the result of the special symbol propriety determination is out. Reach means, for example, a state in which the left and right two production patterns 8R and 8L are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the same pattern, and the remaining one medium production pattern 8C is fluctuating ("7 ↓ 7" situation). Then, if the changing middle production pattern 8C stops with the same pattern as the stopped production patterns 8R and 8L, the three production patterns stop with the same pattern, and a win is achieved. It should be noted that the stop (temporary stop) of the production pattern in this case includes a display (shake fluctuation) in which the production pattern display area 7b is somewhat shaken. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0-126.

Also, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0-198. Random numbers obtained based on passage through the gate 28 include random numbers for normal symbol suitability determination shown in FIG. 8(B). The normal symbol suitability determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol lottery). The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0-240.

Next, the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of game states by combining the probability variation function for special symbols and normal symbols, the variation time shortening function, and the opening extension function in an operating state or a non-operating state. . For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability variation function is operating is called "high probability state", and the state in which it is not operating is "normal state (also referred to as "low probability state"). ”. In the high-probability state, the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol suitability determination (first special symbol suitability determination and second special symbol suitability determination) is higher than in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the success/failure determination is performed using the normal state jackpot determination table, but in the high-probability state, the jackpot determination table for the high-probability state with a large value of the special symbol hit/fail determination random number that is determined as the jackpot is used. is used to determine whether it is appropriate or not (see FIG. 9(A)). In other words, when the special pattern probability variation function is activated, the probability that the variation display of the special symbols will result in a big win (a stopped symbol becomes a big win pattern) is higher than when it is not activated.

In addition, the state in which the variable time reduction function is operating for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is called "time saving state", and the state in which it is not operating is called "non-time saving state". In the time-saving state, the average value of the special symbol variation time (the time from the start of the variable display to the time of the final display) is shorter than the average value of the special symbol variation time in the non-time-saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective entry into the starting port (an entry that can be remembered as a special figure reservation) is more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may operate simultaneously, or only one of them may operate. Then, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbols operate in synchronization with the variation time shortening function for the special symbols. That is, the normal symbol probability variation function and variation time reduction function operate in the time-saving state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the hit probability in normal design propriety determination is higher than the non-time-saving state. That is, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger than the normal symbol per determination table used in the non-time saving state, using the normal symbol per determination table, normal symbol success determination (normal symbol determination) (See FIG. 8(D)). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the variable display of the normal symbols will result in a hit (the stopped symbol will become a normal winning symbol) is higher than when it is not activated. .

In addition, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal design is shorter than in the non-working time saving state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of normal symbols is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 8(E)). Furthermore, in the time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than the non-time saving state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is in operation. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of opening times of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is higher than in the non-time saving state. That is, the function of increasing the number of openings of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol propriety determination is hit in the non-time saving state, the opening and closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation of 0.2 seconds once, and the second start port is open during that period. Become. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol suitability determination is a hit in the time saving state, the opening/closing member 37 of the variable prize winning device 22 performs the opening operation of 2.0 seconds three times.

Under the circumstances where the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and the opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, compared to the case where these functions are not operating As a result, the second starting port 21 is opened frequently, and the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 21 increases (also referred to as "high frequency state"). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls (proportion of awarded balls), increases. Accordingly, the state in which these functions are activated is referred to as the "high base state" and the state in which they are not activated is referred to as the "low base state." In the high base state, a big hit can be aimed at without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand. In this embodiment, the base value calculated in the low base state is displayed on the information display section 88 . That is, the number of outs (the number of shot balls) and the number of winning balls in the high base state and the jackpot game state are not reflected in the base value displayed on the information display section 88 .

A high base state (high frequency state) may not be one in which all of the above functions are activated. That is, by operating at least one of the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22, than when the function is not in operation It is sufficient that the second starting port is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Also, the high base state may be controlled independently without accompanying the time saving state of the special symbol. A function for generating such a high base state can also be called a "high base generation function".

As shown in FIG. 7, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the game state after the special game in the case of the 15R first jackpot is determined by passing through the specific area 39 during the special game. , a special symbol high probability state, a special symbol time saving state, and a high base state. This game state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state". The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times, or when a big win is achieved and a big win game is executed.

In addition, in the game state after the special game when the 15R second big hit is achieved, it is extremely difficult to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game, so the normal state of the special symbols and the time-saving state of the special symbols. And it will be in a high base state. In particular, this game state is referred to as "low certainty high base state (also referred to as "time saving mode")". The low-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or when a big win is won and the big win game is executed. Although the possibility is extremely low, if it passes through the specific area 39, it will be in a "high probability high base state". In addition, in the normal state (low-probability base state), the game state after the special game in the case of the 2R third big hit, if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game, the special symbol is high. It will be in a probability state, a special symbol non-time saving state, and a low base state. This game state is particularly referred to as a "high-probability-low base state". The high-probability-low base state ends when the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times, or when a big win is achieved and a big win game is executed.

This high-probability-low base state is a state in which the high-probability state is latent, that is, a state in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the high-probability state. That is, the high-probability-low base state is the so-called "latent probability variable state". In addition, such a state in which the jackpot probability of the current special symbol propriety determination is low probability or high probability (low probability state or high probability state) is not notified is referred to as "probability non-notification state". On the other hand, the above-mentioned high-probability-high base state is a state in which it is clear to the player that it is a high-probability state. That is, the high probability high base state is the so-called "probability variation gaming state (also referred to as "probability variation mode")". Further, in the high base state, the game state after the special game in the case of the 2R third big hit is a state with a high probability of special symbols and a special symbol if the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. Time saving state and high base state. That is, the time saving function of the special symbols and the base state are the same as the state before execution of the special game. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is the normal state of the special symbols, the non-time-saving state of the special symbols, and the low base state. This game state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state".

In addition, in a high base state such as a high probability high base state or a low probability high base state, the game can be advantageously progressed by making the game ball enter the right game area 3B by hitting to the right. In addition, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. This is because Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28 that triggers the normal symbol propriety determination, the game ball is hit to the right to enter the second start port 21. - 特許庁This makes it possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for special symbol propriety determination) rather than hitting left. In this state, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up in a predetermined manner to inform that the ball should be shot to the right game area.

On the other hand, in a low base state such as a high-probability-low base state or a low-probability-low base state, the game can be played more advantageously by entering the game ball into the left game area 3A by hitting to the left. In addition, in the low base state, the second starting port 21 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the first starting port 20 than to enter the second starting port 21. It is because Therefore, the player hits left to enter the game ball into the first starting hole 20. - 特許庁This makes it possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for special symbol propriety determination) than hitting to the right. In this state, the shooting direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up (display controlled) in a predetermined manner, and informs that the ball should be shot to the left game area. Specifically, the shooting direction indicator 47 is composed of two "yz" LEDs, and indicates the shooting direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the left game area by displaying both LEDs as "yzz" (for example, □: off, ▪: on). can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the ball should be shot to the right game area by lighting up both LEDs such as "yz" (for example, □: off, ▪: on). can.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control section) will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 45. FIG. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 . The game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 12 from the ROM of the main control board 80 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on. . As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, an initial setting process, which will be described later, is first performed (S101). In the initial setting process (S101), for example, in addition to processing such as game state recovery processing and game state initialization processing, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of main control board 80, SIO , PIO, and CTC (interrupt time controller), and reset various flags, statuses, and counters. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial setting process (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter (after the game is started). In the examples and drawings, the normal design is "General", the special design is "Special", the first special design is "Special 1", "1st Special", and the second special design is "Special 2". It is sometimes called the "Second Special Plan".

Also, following the initial setting process (S101), a mode setting process (S106), which will be described later, is executed. In this mode setting process, it is determined whether predetermined change conditions (change timing, change operation) described later are satisfied, and if the change conditions are satisfied, the setting change to the game mode selected by the mode setting switch 82 It is a process that makes it possible. Also, in this mode setting process, it is determined whether or not predetermined confirmation conditions (confirmation timing, confirmation operation) to be described later are satisfied. mode confirmation processing for displaying and confirming. Like the initial setting process (S101), this mode setting process (S106) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter (after the game is started).

Further, following the mode setting process (S106), a power-on notification process (S107), which will be described later, is executed. In this power-on notification process, it is a process of notifying in different modes depending on whether or not the backed up game state information is initialized and whether or not the setting of the game mode is changed when the power is turned on. This power-on notification process (S107), like the initial setting process (S101) and mode setting process (S106), is executed only once after the power is turned on, and thereafter (after the game starts). shall not be executed.

Further, following the power-on notification process (S107), it is determined whether or not the initialization flag is ON (S108). If it is determined that the stored game information has been initialized (erased) (RAM cleared) (YES in S108), the initialization flag is turned OFF (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. On the other hand, if it is determined in S108 that the initialization flag is not ON, that is, the RAM clearing process has not been performed (NO in S108), the initialization flag is already OFF, so the process proceeds directly to S110. In S110, interrupts are permitted (S110), and the process proceeds to S102. As a result, the interrupt processing (S105) can be executed, and if the gaming machine is in the game mode change state or the game mode confirmation state, the state ends and the game shifts to the game ready state. Also, as a result, the display content of the information display section 88, which will be described later, is switched from the information indicating the game mode to the information indicating the base value. In addition, in S102, interrupt is prohibited (S102), and the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by adding one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80 .

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) ends, the interrupt is permitted (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed, for example, based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a 4 ms cycle. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed, the update process of various counter values by the normal design/special design main random number update process (S103) is repeated until the next interrupt process (S105) is started. executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU while the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Initial setting process]
Next, the initial setting process (S101) will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the initial setting process (S101), first, interrupts are prohibited (S3001), and a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack area for securing a stack area is performed (S3002). Next, interrupt setting processing for setting the interrupt mode (S3003), built-in device setting processing for setting various built-in devices such as CTC (counter timer circuit) and PIO (peripheral device interface) (S3004), S3006 to process.

At S3006, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not a pressing operation has been performed (S3006). If it is determined in S3006 that the RAM clear switch is OFF, that is, that the power has been turned on without the RAM clear switch being operated (NO in S3006), then whether the power off flag is normally turned ON. is determined (S3007). If it is determined in S3007 that the power-off flag is ON (YES in S3007), RAM check data is calculated for the backup areas (161, 162) in RAM (S3008). The RAM check data is calculated by adding the input port status, the value of the power-off flag, and the contents of the RAM area protected when the power is off for each byte, and then inverting all the bits.

Next, the check data calculated in S3008 is compared with the check data stored in the RAM when the power is cut off (also called "power failure"), and it is determined whether the check data is normal (S3009). . If it is determined in S3009 that the calculated check data in the RAM and the saved check data match (YES in S3009), it is determined that the backup data saved in the RAM backup area (161, 162) at the time of power shutdown is normal. Then, initialize (clear to 0) areas other than the RAM area (backup area, etc.) used when performing power restoration processing, and set the game state (probability state, time saving state, number of reservations, game Mode, special design status, normal design status, etc.) are restored (restored) (S3010). Next, the power failure flag is turned OFF (S3011), and a "power-on command for power failure recovery (power failure recovery command)" is sent to the sub-control board 90 (S3012), and the process ends. In addition, the "power failure recovery command" includes a setting value corresponding to the game state (low probability state, high probability state, whether it is during time saving, status information, etc.), and based on this setting value, the sub control board The control state of 90 also returns to the control state at the time of the power failure (before the power failure).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3006 that the RAM clear switch is ON, that is, the power was turned on while the RAM clear switch was being operated (the power was turned on while pressing RAM clear) (YES in S3006), Alternatively, if it is determined in S3007 that the power-off flag is not normally ON (that is, OFF or abnormal) (NO in S3007), or if it is determined that the check data in the RAM do not match (S3009 In NO), the entire area (including the backup area) of the RAM (the RAM of the main control unit 80 and the payout control unit) is initialized (S3013). A "power-on command for RAM clear (RAM clear command)" is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 (S3014), the initialization flag is turned ON (S3015), and the process ends.

By performing this processing, when the power switch is turned off, the power switch is turned on while the RAM clear switch is operated (while it is turned on), and if the RAM clear switch is kept on until a predetermined time, a RAM clear signal is generated. is sent to the main control board 80, and the entire RAM area including the backup area is initialized. On the other hand, if the power is turned on without such an operation, the game state (control state) at the time of power failure is restored based on the game state information (including the game mode) stored in the backup area. It will be done. This makes it possible to restore the game state (control state) in the middle of the game when the power supply resumes even in the event of an unexpected power outage, etc., preventing the player from suffering unexpected damage. It becomes possible to

[Mode setting process]
Next, the mode setting process (S106) will be described with reference to FIG. In the mode setting process, the game mode before the power is turned off is changed to another game mode selected from the five types of game modes 1 to 5 described above (game mode change state), and the current state It is a process of confirming the set game mode (game mode confirmation state). In this mode setting process, a specific change condition is set, and unless the change condition is satisfied, even if the mode setting switch 82 is operated, the setting of the game mode cannot be changed. Similarly, a specific confirmation condition is set, and unless the confirmation condition is satisfied, the setting of the game mode cannot be confirmed.

Specifically, in the mode setting process (S106), first, the initialization maintenance flag, the setting change flag, and the recovery flag are turned OFF (S3120), and the process proceeds to S3101. By this processing, if the initialization maintenance flag, the setting change flag, and the recovery flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if they are already OFF, they are kept OFF, and all of them are turned OFF. Then, only one of the flags is turned ON depending on the power-on mode by the processing described later. In S3101, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag is ON, that is, whether or not the RAM is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on (S3101). If it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is ON (YES in S3101), then it is determined whether or not the mode setting key (mode setting lock) is ON (S3102). That is, it is determined whether or not the aforementioned setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 and is operated from the OFF position to the ON position. When it is determined that the mode setting key is not ON, that is, the setting key is not operated (not inserted) and the mode setting lock portion 89 is OFF (NO in S3102), the game state is backed up. The information is erased (initialized) and the initialization maintenance flag (also referred to as "first start flag") indicating that the game mode setting has not been changed (setting is maintained) is turned ON (S3111), Finish processing.

In this way, even if the backup area is initialized when the power is turned on to the game machine, the game mode can be set by simply performing the initialization unless the mode setting lock portion 89 is turned on when the power is turned on. cannot be changed. Next, in S3102, if it is determined that the mode setting key is ON, that is, the setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89, and the setting key is operated from the OFF position to the ON position. (YES in S3102), the process proceeds to S3103. This is done by inserting the setting key into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 while the power is off, and pressing the power switch 84 while pressing the RAM clear switch 83 while the setting key is turned to the ON position. It shows the ON state. This means that both the RAM clear switch 83 and the mode setting lock 89 are turned on when the power is turned on. In this embodiment, this is the condition for changing the game mode. As a result, the game machine enters a "game mode change state" in which the game mode setting can be changed to any setting.

In S3103, it is determined whether the mode change flag indicating the "game mode change state" is ON (S3103), and if it is determined that the mode change flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the mode change flag is changed. By turning ON, it is set to "game mode change state" (S3104), and the process proceeds to S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3103 that the mode change flag is already ON (YES in S3103), the process proceeds to S3105. In S3105, the player reads the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 that allows the player to arbitrarily operate and select an arbitrary game mode (S3105), sets the game mode corresponding to the read selection information (S3106), The game mode set in S3106 is displayed on the information display section 88 (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3108. In addition, the display mode of the information display section 88 when displaying the game mode is that the first information display section 88a, the second information display section 88b, and the third information display section 88c are all displayed in the central portion of the seven segments. Only the segments are lit and displayed, and the remaining segments and dot display portions are turned off. Then, the rightmost fourth information display portion 88d is used to display the game mode. The display mode is any one of [1], [2], [3], [4] and [5], and in the "game mode change state", the operation part 82a of the mode setting switch 82 is slid. Each time, information ([1], [2], [3], [4] or [5]) indicating the corresponding game mode is displayed. Also, the dot display section is turned off. For example, when game mode 3 is selected, the information display section displays [---3].

At S3108, it is determined whether the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the setting key inserted into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 is rotated from the ON position to the OFF position, and the mode setting lock portion 89 is turned OFF. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S3108). That is, in the "game mode change state", it is determined whether or not the setting change operation to any game mode has been completed and the setting key has been returned to the OFF position (operation to end the "game mode change state"). If it is determined in S3108 that the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the setting key is still in the OFF position (NO in S3108), the process returns to S3103 and repeats the processing up to S3108. As a result, the game clerk or the like maintains the "game mode change state" until the setting key is operated to the OFF position (by keeping it at the ON position), and reliably sets an arbitrary (intended) game mode. (settings can be changed).

Then, when setting to an arbitrary (intended) game mode is completed, the setting key is operated (returned) to the OFF position, and the "game mode change state" is terminated. It should be noted that once the "game mode change state" is completed, the gaming machine is put into the "game mode change state" unless the power is turned off again and the power is turned on again in a manner that satisfies a specific change condition. It is not possible. In addition, although the setting key is operated (returned) to the OFF position to end the "game mode change state", instead of this, the setting key is operated (returned) to the OFF position to turn the setting key. The "game mode change state" may be terminated by pulling out from the insertion portion 89a. Also, even when the "game mode change state" is set, the "game mode change state" may be terminated without changing the game mode.

At S3108, the mode setting key is OFF, that is, when it is determined that the setting key has been operated to the OFF position (YES at S3108), the mode change flag is turned OFF and the "game mode change state" ends (S3109). , the game state information backed up is erased (initialized), and a setting change flag (also referred to as a "second activation flag") indicating that the setting of the game mode has been changed is turned ON (S3110), and the process ends. . In this embodiment, even if the game mode is not changed in the "game mode change state", the setting change flag is turned ON. The game mode that has been set is stored (not deleted), and if the game mode is not changed in the "game mode change state", the initialization maintenance flag may be turned ON.

In S3101, when it is determined that the initialization flag is not ON, that is, the backed-up game state information is not erased (initialized) (NO in S3101), it is assumed that the specific change condition is not satisfied, and the "game mode change state”, and proceeds to the processing of S3112. In S3112, the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is read (S3112), and the selection information of the read mode selection switch and the game (currently set) stored in the RAM by the recovery processing of the initial setting processing described above are performed. It is determined whether or not the mode matches (S3114). Next, when it is determined in S3114 that the results of the comparison determination in S3113 match (YES in S3114), the process proceeds to S3116. In S3116, it is determined whether or not the error is being reported (S3116), and if it is determined that the error is not being reported (NO in S3116), the backed up game state information is restored (not initialized) (and the game mode is set is not changed), a recovery flag (also referred to as a "third activation flag") is turned ON (S3118), a mode confirmation process, which will be described later, is performed (S3119), and the process ends.

That is, when the power is turned on, the game state (control state) at the time of power failure is restored based on the game state information stored in the backup area without performing a predetermined operation on the RAM clear switch, When the setting state of the mode setting switch is not changed, the processing order is as described above, and the game can be started without changing the game mode (without going through the "game mode change state").

If it is determined in S3114 that the comparison determination results in S3113 do not match (NO in S3114), error notification is performed (S3115), and the process proceeds to S3114 again. Then, the processes of S3114 and S3115 are repeated and error notification is continued until it is determined that they match in S3114. It should be noted that, until it is determined in S3114 that they match, the error notification is continued and the state in which the game can be started is not changed. That is, the game is stopped. In this way, if it is determined that they do not match in S3114, the game state (control state) at the time of power failure is restored based on the game state information stored in the backup area (game state restoration processing in the initial setting processing). ), and when the setting state of the mode setting switch is changed (when the mode setting switch 82 is operated despite not being in the "game mode change state"). In addition, in the error notification, an error display indicating that "the mode setting switch has been illegally operated" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or a predetermined error is displayed on the board surface lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, or the speaker 67. It is possible to make a notification. Moreover, in the error notification, both the correct game mode setting and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch may be indicated by some kind of display. As a result, it is possible to quickly correct the setting position of the game mode by the mode setting switch 82 and terminate the error notification.

On the other hand, during execution of the error notification, the setting state of the mode setting switch 82 is returned to the position corresponding to the game mode (backed up game mode setting) set in the game machine (that is, the state at the time of power failure). Thus, it is determined that they match in S3114 (YES in S3114), and it becomes possible to shift to the processing of S3116. In S3116, it is determined whether or not an error is being reported (S3116), and if it is determined that an error is being reported (YES in S3116), the error reporting is terminated (S3117), and the process proceeds to S3118. As a result, a game can be started (“playable state”). As another method of ending (canceling) this error notification, there is a method of temporarily turning off the power switch, performing a predetermined input operation to the RAM clear switch, and turning on the power switch. At this time, regardless of whether or not the setting key is operated, the error notification is terminated by the initialization of the error information. In addition, when the power switch is turned off, the setting key is turned to the on position, the RAM clear switch is operated, and the power switch is turned on, the error notification is terminated, and the game mode is changed to the mode setting. It becomes possible to change to a game mode corresponding to the selection information of the switch 82 . Such a method also makes it possible to end the error notification (error processing).

In a pachinko game machine having a game mode setting change function as in this embodiment, when the game machine frame is opened for maintenance or the like, a game clerk, a maintenance company, or the like carelessly (erroneously) presses the mode setting switch 82 . , and unintentionally operate the mode setting switch. In such a case, it is possible to return to the original set position if the user realizes that he/she has made an erroneous operation, but there are cases where he/she does not realize that he or she has made an erroneous operation. Also, there is a possibility that someone illegally opens the gaming machine frame and operates the mode setting switch 82 . As a result, the game mode (selection information) indicated (selected) by the mode setting switch may be changed. In such a case, the game mode can be changed without restriction (even after the game has started), or the game mode can be changed by reading the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 without any special restriction when the power is turned on. Then, the game mode may be changed to a game mode unintended by the game parlor, or a game mode that is advantageous to the fraudulent player may be changed, resulting in unforeseen disadvantages for the amusement parlor or the like. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, a specific change condition is set, and unless this change condition is satisfied, the mode setting switch 82 is operated to move the operation part 82a to a position where an arbitrary game mode can be set. Even if it is moved, it does not change to the game mode corresponding to the position (selection information).

This makes it difficult to illegally change the game mode, and makes it possible to prevent the game mode setting from being changed easily even when the mode setting switch 82 is operated by mistake. Also, the setting of the game mode can be changed only when the game machine is initialized when the power is turned on and the mode setting lock is turned on by operating the setting key at a specific time. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of fraud. Specifically, if it is possible to change the game mode during the game or when the game state is restored, for example, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is the highest "game mode 3 ”, and enter the high probability state, change the setting to “game mode 4” or “game mode 5”, increase the probability of hitting the jackpot in the high probability state, or increase the continuation rate of the high probability state fraud can occur. However, in this embodiment, it is necessary to initialize the game machine (RAM clear) in order to change the setting of the game mode. need to be in a state. This prevents such fraud from occurring.

In this way, the timing for changing the game mode is set to "when the power is turned on (power supply is started)", and the game mode can be changed only "when the game machine is initialized and the setting key is operated in a predetermined manner". It is possible to call such things as "game mode change conditions". In addition, since it is possible to change the game mode only in the process (mode setting process) performed in the period before the start of the game after turning on the power, the state in which the game state has changed from the initial state (for example, high probability state, high base state, time-saving state, during jackpot game, during variable display of symbols), the game mode cannot be changed.

[Mode confirmation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, mode confirmation processing (S3119) for confirming the game mode being set will be described. In the mode confirmation process (S3119), first, whether or not the mode setting key is ON, that is, whether or not the backed-up game state information is restored without being erased (initialized), and whether or not the mode setting lock portion 89 is in the ON state is checked. Judge (S5001). If it is determined in S5001 that the mode setting key is ON (YES in S5001), the process proceeds to S5002. That is, in the power off state, the setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 and rotated from the OFF position to the ON position, and without turning ON the RAM clear switch (initialization operation is performed). , and remains OFF), and the power is turned on. In this case, the game machine is put into the "game mode confirmation state" assuming that the specific confirmation condition is satisfied.

In S5002, it is determined whether or not the mode confirmation flag indicating that the set game mode is in the "game mode confirmation state" is ON (S5002), and if it is determined that the mode confirmation flag is not ON (NO in S5002), the mode confirmation flag is turned ON to set the "game mode confirmation state", and the process proceeds to S5004. At S5002, the mode confirmation flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that it has already been set to the "game mode confirmation state" (YES at S5002), the process proceeds to S5004. At S5004, the game mode currently being set (stored in the backup area) is read (S5004), then the read game mode is displayed on the information display section 88 (S5005), and the mode setting key is turned OFF. Determine whether (S5006).

When the currently set game mode is displayed on the information display section 88, the information corresponding to the game mode is displayed on the rightmost fourth information display section 88d by the same display control as described above. do. Also, the display control for the other information display portions (88a, 88b, 88c) is the same as described above. At S5001, when it is determined that the mode setting key is not OFF, that is, it is still in the "game mode confirmation state" (NO at S5006), the process returns to S5002, and the processes up to S5006 are performed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5006 that the mode setting key is OFF, that is, if it is determined that the game clerk has finished confirming the game mode and has turned the setting key to the OFF position (YES in S5006), the mode confirmation flag is turned OFF. to end the "game mode confirmation state" (S5007) and finish the process. On the other hand, when it is determined at S5001 that the mode setting key is not ON (NO at S5001), the process is finished without generating "game mode confirmation state". Further, when it is determined that the mode setting key is ON without being initialized, a display unit such as an LED may be used to notify that the "game mode confirmation state" has been set. Similarly, when the "game mode change state" is set, a notification indicating that the game mode change state has been set may be performed. Then, these notifications are ended based on transition to a playable state. As a result, the game clerk or the like can easily grasp whether the state of the gaming machine is set to the "game mode change state" or the "game mode confirmation state".

As described above, the game mode confirmation timing is set to "when the power is turned on (power supply is started)", and the game mode confirmation is set to "when the game machine is not initialized and the setting key is operated in a predetermined manner". It is possible to call it "game mode confirmation condition". In addition, since it is possible to confirm the game mode only in the process (mode setting process) performed in the period before the start of the game after turning on the power, it is possible to confirm the game mode while executing the game (during the execution of the game). can't. As a result, the player (unauthorized player) checks the game mode of the game machine during the game, and illegally selects a game machine with a high setting (for example, game mode 3) advantageous to him/herself and plays the game. can be prevented as much as possible.

[Notification process at power-on]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the power-on notification process (S107) for notifying in which of the above-described power-on modes the power is turned on will be described. In the power-on notification process (S107), first, whether or not the initialization maintenance flag is ON, that is, whether the flag indicating the power-on mode (activation mode) turned ON in the mode setting process (S106) is the initialization maintenance flag. is determined (S5101). At S5101, if it is determined that the initialization maintenance flag is ON (YES at S5101), the power-on mode indicated by the initialization maintenance flag [the game state information is initialized and the setting of the game mode is not changed. Not yet] corresponding to the "first notification mode (first start-up notification mode)" (S5102), and the process proceeds to S5103.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5101 that the initialization maintenance flag is not ON (NO in S5101), then whether or not the setting change flag is ON, i. mode) is a setting change flag (S5105). At S5105, when it is determined that the setting change flag is ON (YES at S5105), the power-on mode indicated by the setting change flag [the game state information is initialized and the setting of the game mode is changed] Notification is made in the corresponding "second notification mode (second start-up notification mode)" (S5106), then a setting change command is transmitted to the sub-controller 90 (S5108), and the process proceeds to S5103. The setting change command is transmitted when [the game state information is initialized and the setting of the game mode is changed (the setting is changed)]. In addition, the sub-control unit 90 that has received the setting change command uses the notification unit (production pattern display unit, board lamp, speaker, etc.) controlled by the sub-control unit 90 to notify that the game mode setting has been changed. show. The notifications (S5102, S5106, S5107) in this power-on notification processing are executed by the notification means (display unit) controlled by the main control unit 80. FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5105 that the setting change flag is not ON (NO in S5105), it is determined that the flag indicating the power-on mode (activation mode) turned ON in the mode setting process (S106) is the recovery flag. , "3rd notification mode (at the time of the 3rd startup Notification Mode)” (S5107), and the process proceeds to S5103.

Here, the "first notification mode (first startup notification mode)", "second notification mode (second startup notification mode)", and "third notification mode (third startup notification mode)" are respectively It is assumed that different notification modes are used, and a person who comes into contact with (sees) these notification modes determines whether the power-on mode (activation mode) performed by himself/herself is as intended (game mode change). (presence or absence of initialization). In addition, the first notification mode, the second notification mode, and the third notification mode are the display modes (display characters, display characters, display color, luminous color, flashing speed, lighting time, etc.) performed by LEDs, liquid crystal display units, etc. can be different. Also, the sounds (type of sound, volume) output from the speaker can be different. Moreover, these multiple elements may be combined and executed, or may be executed singly. Moreover, a plurality of elements may be different from other notification modes, or only one element may be different from other notification modes.

Further, these notification modes may be executed only by the display section provided on the back side of the gaming machine and not executed by the display section provided on the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, a game mode setter such as a game clerk can confirm the power-on state, but it is possible to make it difficult for others, for example, a player, to confirm the power-on state. Further, the notification may be performed by a plurality of notification units provided on the back side of the gaming machine and on the front side of the gaming machine. This makes it possible to more reliably confirm whether or not the power-on mode (activation mode) performed by the user is as intended. Also, the notification may be performed only by the notification unit provided on the front side of the gaming machine.

In addition, any one of "first notification mode (first startup notification mode)", "second notification mode (second startup notification mode)" and "third notification mode (third startup notification mode)" A counting means (clocking means) for counting (clocking) the notification time from the start of the notification is provided. In S5103, based on the value of the counting means (clocking means), it is determined whether the specific notification time has passed (S5103), and if it is determined that the specific notification time has not passed (NO in S5103), S5103 , and the determination is made again until the specific notification time (S5103). If it is determined in S5103 that the specific notification time has passed (YES in S5103), the notification being executed is ended (S5104), and the process ends. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the specific notification time is set to about 10 seconds. In this way, the power-on mode (whether or not initialization was performed, whether or not the setting was changed) was used to change the notification mode associated with power-on, so that the game clerk, etc., could determine the intended power-on mode by himself/herself. It is possible to check whether or not it does.

In addition, if initialization (RAM clear) is performed, initialization notification will be performed, and if initialization is not performed, initialization notification will not be performed, and even if initialization is performed, when changing game mode settings The form of the initialization notification may be changed depending on whether or not it is performed (first initialization notification, second initialization notification).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the interrupt process (S105), the output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), the command (control signal) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc. do. The commands to be output here include the game state, the result of the special symbol suitability determination, the symbol as the big hit type, the information related to the variation pattern, and the like. A command consists of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information about the command type, and the lower 1 byte is information about the contents of the command.

In the input process (S202) that follows the output process (S201), various sensors (first starting sensor 20a, second starting sensor 21a, first big winning sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko game machine 1 30a, second big winning hole sensor 35a, general ball entrance sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) is read and stored in the output buffer of RAM as winning ball information. Also, a detection signal from a lower tray full detection sensor for detecting the fullness of the lower tray 62 is taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as lower tray full data.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the updating process of various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. period until the next interrupt process (S105) starts).

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S203), the base display process (S212) described later, the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) described later, the normal figure operation process (S205), the special figure operation process (S206) , Specific area sensor detection processing (S207), start-up ball processing (S208), power-off monitoring processing (S209), and mode setting monitoring processing (S210) are executed. After that, other processing (S210) not deeply related to the present invention is executed, and the interrupt processing (S105) ends. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80, the processing of S102 to S104 of the main control main processing is repeatedly executed, and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 ms), the interrupt processing is performed again. (S105) is executed. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) that is executed again, the commands set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Base display processing]
Next, using FIG. 17, base display processing (S212 ) will be explained. A game ball is launched into the game area 3, and when the launched game ball enters a ball entrance (award winning opening) such as the first start opening 20, the second start opening 21, or the general ball entrance 27, the ball enters. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player for each mouth (gaming profit is awarded). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3, the game area 3 is provided with a large number of game pegs 16 that change the flowing direction of the game ball. The ball entry rate of game balls will change.

In addition, game machines installed in amusement arcades are inspected by a predetermined third-party inspection agency, and only game machines that pass the inspection are recognized as proper gaming machines and can be installed in amusement arcades. Also, this inspection target includes a base value, and it is necessary to execute a game with an appropriate base value. However, the higher the base value (the higher the rate of ball entry into the ball entrance), the more advantageous it is for the player. In some cases, the ball entry rate was reduced. If such an adjustment is made, the installed gaming machine will have different performance from the gaming machine that has passed the inspection, which is not appropriate.

Therefore, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with the above-described out sensor 29 to count the number (total number) of game balls shot into the game area and count the game balls paid out as prize balls, The base value of the game machine is calculated and displayed. The base values in this embodiment include a first base value and a second base value. ) and the total number of prize balls stored for calculating the first base value, the base value (real-time base value) for the entire period (excluding the high base state and during the jackpot game) is shown (first period-based value). In addition, the "second base value" is the number of balls fired during the special period (the number of outs during the special period) stored for calculating the second base value in the specified special period, and the number of balls that are stored for calculating the second base value It shows the number of special period prize balls and the base value (fixed period base value) of the special period from.

More specifically, the second base value is calculated by "the total number of prize balls in the relevant period/5000" each time the total number of shot game balls reaches 5000 pieces. The second base value is updated each time 5000 total shot balls are counted. Therefore, the second base value is not displayed until the total number of shot balls reaches 5000 in the gaming machine that starts the game for the first time. Specifically, until the first second base value is calculated, only the centers of the 7-segment display portions of the third information display portion 88c and the fourth information display portion 88d are flashed. --' is displayed. Further, the calculated first base value and second base value are displayed on the information display section 88, and this information display section 88 displays , the base value (first base value or second base value) is always displayed. The main control board 80 is provided (mounted) with a display changeover switch (not shown) for switching the display content of the base value of the information display section 88 to the first base value or the second base value. By operating the display changeover switch in this base display state (playable state), it is possible to switch the display content displayed on the information display section 88 to the first base value or the second base value.

Further, the display mode of the base value in the information display section 88 is a display mode that can display information indicating which base value is being displayed and the base value up to the second decimal place. Incidentally, in order to establish the operation of the amusement arcade, the base value (the number of prize balls/the number of shot balls) is usually smaller than "1". A specific display mode will be described below. For example, assume that the first base value is "0.25" and the second base value is "0.26" at a predetermined timing. When displaying the first base value, the 7-segment display portions of the first information display portion 88a and the second information display portion 88b are used to perform lighting display so that "b1" is displayed, and the second information display portion 88b Light up the dot display to indicate the decimal point. Then, the numerical value below the decimal point is displayed using the 7-segment display portions of the third information display portion 88c and the fourth information display portion 88d. As a result, the information display section 88 displays "b1.25". Since this first base value is a base value that changes in real time, it changes in real time to "b1.26" and "b1.24" according to an increase in the percentage of winning balls and an increase in the percentage of outs. The base value shall be calculated by rounding to the third decimal place. Also, the display mode of the second base value displayed by operating a predetermined changeover switch is the same as that of the first base value, and specifically, "b2.26" is displayed.

Also, in this embodiment, every time 5000 shot balls are counted, a new second base value is calculated and the base value displayed as the second base value is updated. In other words, when the total number of shot balls is 0 to 4999, "second base value: no display" is used, and when the total number of shot balls is 5000 to 9999, "second base value: the base value for the period of 1 to 5000" is displayed. display", "second base value: update display to the base value in the period of 5001 to 10000" when the total number of shot balls is 10,000 to 14,999, and so on.

In this embodiment, only the most recently calculated second base value is displayed. These base values may be displayed by operating a predetermined changeover switch. The second base value is stored as a past second base value for each update, the second base value one time before is set as the third base value, the second base value two times before is set as the fourth base value, . . , may be displayed in order, with the second base value three times before as the fifth base value. As a result, the past second base value can also be checked (inspected).

The first base value is calculated in real time each time the out-sensor 29 detects a shot ball (out-ball) and each time a prize ball is dispensed. The display shall be updated each time. In addition, as another aspect, the first base value has a large error (numerical value is not stable) due to accidental continuous ball entry immediately after the start of the game, so the total number of shot balls (total number of outs) is a specific number. The calculated value (first base value) may not be displayed (not displayed) until the number reaches (for example, 200). For example, only the center of the 7-segment display portion of the third information display portion 88c and the fourth information display portion 88d may blink until the specified number of balls is reached. Specifically, "b1. --' is displayed. Then, the first base value calculated when the total number of shot balls reaches 200 may be displayed (for example, "b1.35").

In addition, base values such as the first base value, the second base value (including the third base value, the fourth base value, etc.), and data for calculating the base value (the number of fired balls, the number of prize balls count values, etc.) are to be backed up when a power failure occurs, and are stored in a specific backup area. Further, the base-related information stored in this specific backup area is used for inspection and confirmation, and therefore is excluded from initialization using a RAM clear switch or the like. Therefore, the base-related information is information that is not erased even if the gaming machine is initialized.

As another aspect, it is impossible to initialize these base-related information without opening the main control board storage case that houses the main control board 80. Initialization may be enabled by opening the package and operating a switch or the like provided inside. As a result, when there is an abnormality in the base value or the like, it is possible to perform initialization (reset) by opening the main control board housing case after inspection. In addition, since it is necessary to destroy some parts when opening the main control board storage case (because it is configured so that it can be identified that it has been opened), if base-related information is erased illegally, The act is made recognizable. This makes it possible to prevent fraud.

Information indicating these base values (first base value, second base value, etc.) may be externally output from a predetermined external terminal to a hall computer or the like connected to the external terminal. This makes it possible for the hall computer to easily grasp the abnormality of the base value. In addition, a plurality of base values (first base value, second base value, etc.) received by the hall computer are managed, and base abnormality determination means provided in the hall computer detects an abnormality in a plurality of (all) base values. If it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the abnormality. As a mode of anomaly notification, a base error is displayed on the display unit (liquid crystal, LED, lamp, etc.) connected to the hall computer, or a base error is indicated on the external lamp of the game machine provided for each game machine. display in a form, display in a form indicating that some kind of error has occurred, or output an error sound from a speaker. Of course, when such a base error occurs, the error display or error sound may be output not only from the display unit connected to the hall computer, but also from the display unit or the speaker provided in the gaming machine. As a result, when a base error occurs, the game parlor can quickly notice the occurrence of the error and prevent unexpected disadvantages as much as possible.

In the base display process (S212), first, it is determined whether or not it is during time saving (S5201), and when it is determined that it is not during time saving (NO in S5201), it is then determined whether or not it is during a big hit game (S5202). In S5202, if it is determined that the jackpot is not in progress (S5202), the process proceeds to S5203. On the other hand, if it is determined at S5201 that the time is being reduced (YES at S5201), and if it is determined at S5202 that the jackpot game is in progress (YES at S5202), the calculation of the first base value and the second base value ( update), and proceed to the processing of S5209. This is because the first base value and the second base value are the number of out balls (number of shot balls) and the number of prize balls generated when the game state is in the low base state (specific period) except during the time saving and during the jackpot game. Calculated based on numbers. That is, the first base value and the second base value are values indicating the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of out balls (number of shot balls) in the normal game state (low base state), The number of balls (the number of balls fired) and the number of prize balls are not used as data for calculating the first base value and the second base value.

At S5203, it is determined whether or not an out ball is detected, that is, whether or not a game ball is detected by the out sensor 29 (S5203). The detected values are added to calculate (update) the first base value and the second base value (including the value for updating to the new second base value) (S5204), and the calculated value is Store (S5205) and move to the processing of S5206. On the other hand, in S5203, when it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the out sensor 29 (NO in S5203), the process proceeds to S5206 without updating the number of out balls. These S5203 to S5205 are processes for updating the number of out balls in calculating the first base value and the second base value.

S5206 determines whether or not prize balls have been paid out (S5206), and if it is determined that prize balls have been paid out (YES in S5206), the number of prize balls that have been paid out is added, and the first Calculate (update) the base value and the second base value (including the value for updating to the new second base value) (S5207), store the calculated values (S5208), and proceed to the processing of S5209 do. On the other hand, when it is determined in S5206 that no prize balls have been paid out (NO in S5206), the process proceeds to S5209 without updating the number of prize balls. These S5206 to S5208 are processes for updating the number of prize balls in calculating the first base value and the second base value.

In S5209, the setting of the information display unit 88, that is, which base value (first base value or second base value) the information display unit 88 is set to display by the changeover switch is read (S5209), and the The updated base value corresponding to the setting is displayed on the information display section 88 (S5210), and the process ends. As a result, the base values to be displayed can be updated at timings corresponding to the respective base values, and when the base values are updated, the updated base values can be displayed on the information display section 88. .

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). . If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal pattern reserved balls (the number of normal pattern reservations, specifically the value of the counter that counts the number of normal pattern reservations provided in the RAM) It is determined whether or not it is 4 or more (S302), and if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal design reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the normal number of reserved design balls (S303), and normal design random number acquisition processing (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random number counter (label-TRND-H) for normal symbol validity determination stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired, and the acquired random value is obtained. (Acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal design reservation balls among the normal design reservation storage units provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 .

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting hole 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting hole sensor 21a (S305). When the game ball has not entered the second start port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309, but when the game ball enters the second start port 21 (YES in S305), the special figure 2 The number of pending balls (the number of second special pending, specifically the number of the counter that counts the number of second special pending provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches 4 (upper limit number) It is determined whether or not there is (S306). Then, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S306), proceed to S309, but if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (S307).

Then special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing (S308) it does. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the random number for determining the jackpot type Obtain the counter value (label-TRND-AS), the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (that is, the random number shown in FIG. 8 (A) ), and store those acquisition random values (acquisition information) in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 2 reservation balls out of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b.

Subsequently, in the starting hole sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting hole 20, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a (S309). ). When the game ball has not entered the first start port 20 (NO in S309), the process is finished, but when the game ball enters the first start port 20 (YES in S309), the special figure The number of 1 reserved balls (the number of the first special figure reservations, specifically the numerical value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches 4 (upper limit number) It is determined whether or not there is (S310). Then, if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls has reached 4 (YES in S310), the process is finished, but if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S311).

Then special figure 1 relation random number acquisition processing (S312) it does. In the special figure 1 relation random number acquisition process (S312), like the special figure 2 relation random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol propriety determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (that is, the random value shown in FIG. 8(A) is obtained), and the obtained random value is stored in the address space corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number out of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a .

[Normal figure action processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal pattern operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 20 following the starting opening sensor detection process (S204). In the general pattern operation process (S205), the processing related to the normal symbol display device 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal pattern operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. . Then, when the "normal pattern operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal pattern operation status" is "2" (S401 NO in S403, YES in S403), perform normal design fluctuation process (S404), and when "normal pattern operation status" is "3" (NO in S401 and S403, YES in S405), normal design confirmation Processing (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. In addition, the general figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Normal symbol standby process]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the normal design standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the normal design is "0" (S501), and if "0" (YES in S501) Finish this process. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol propriety determination process, which will be described later, is performed (S502). Also, following the normal design propriety determination process (S502), the normal design variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8(E) is referred to, and if the game state is a time saving state, a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 1 second is selected. do. On the other hand, if the game state is a non-time-saving state, a normal design variation pattern in which the normal design variation time is 30 seconds is selected. Also, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, a normal symbol random number shift process (S504), which will be described later, is performed. Also, following the normal design random number shift process (S504), the normal design fluctuation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process, the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503 is used to start the normal symbol variation display, and the normal operation status is set to "2". In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the normal symbol variation start.

[Normal symbol suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal symbol validity determination process (S502), first, the value of the normal symbol validity determination random number counter (label-TRND-H) stored in the normal symbol retention storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (that is, whether or not the game state is the time saving state) (S602). In S602, if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, the time saving state (YES in S602), the table for the time saving state out of the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (D) (hit determination value "0" ~ "239") based on the high probability normal pattern right or wrong determination, it is determined whether or not hit (S604), the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for judging normal symbol validity (label -TRND-H) matches any of the hit judgment values. On the other hand, in S602, the time saving flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that it is in the non-time saving state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time saving state out of the normal symbol per determination table shown in FIG. 8 (D) ( Based on the hit determination value "0", "1"), it is determined whether or not there is a hit by the low-probability normal pattern success/failure determination (S603), and the process proceeds to S605.
Then, in S605, the result of the general figure right or wrong determination (S603, S604) determines whether it is a hit (per general figure) (S605), and if it is determined to be off (NO in S605), the stop display is off A normal pattern (normal pattern off pattern) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal pattern) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal pattern (per pattern per normal pattern) to be stopped and displayed is determined (S607), and the flag per normal pattern is turned ON (S608 ) to end the process.

[Normal symbol random number shift process]
After the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) is executed. As shown in FIG. 23, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map reservation in the general map reservation storage unit is shifted by one from the current position to the read side (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest reserved memory in the normal pattern reservation storage unit, is emptied ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth normal pattern reservation is cleared to 0 (S703 ) to end the process. In this way, the reserves are digested in the order of reserves.

[Processing during normal symbol fluctuation]
As shown in FIG. 24, in the process during normal design fluctuation (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal design has passed (S801), and if it has not passed (NO in S801), the process ends. On the other hand, if it has passed (YES in S801), set the normal symbol fluctuation stop command (S802) and set the normal pattern operation status to "3" (S803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the variable display of the normal design with the display result (hitting normal design or losing normal design) according to the judgment result of the random number for normal design propriety determination (S804), this processing finish.

[Normal design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the normal design determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern hit flag is ON (S901). If the normal pattern hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the normal figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON, that is, whether it is in the time saving state (S902). And if it is in the time saving state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). The opening pattern in the time saving state is, as described above, an opening pattern in which opening for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, "3" is set to the second start port open counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, if it is in the non-time-saving state (NO in S902), the open pattern during the non-time-saving state is set as the open pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second start port 21) (S906). The open pattern in the non-time saving state is, as described above, an open pattern that opens once for 0.2 seconds. Therefore, "1" is set to the second starting port open counter. Then, following the setting of the open pattern (S903, S906), the general pattern operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process ends.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 26, in normal electric accessary product processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal pattern is ON (S1001). Ordinary figure per end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. If the normal pattern per end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the time (timing) for opening the second start port 21 has arrived (S1003). If so, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process ends. On the other hand, if the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not the time (timing) for closing the second starting port 21 has come (S1005), if it has not reached (NO in S1005), the process is finished, and if it has reached (YES in S1005), the second starting port 21 is closed (closed). (S1006).

Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port open counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port open counter is "0". (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process ends as it is to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES at S1008), end processing for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and an end flag for normal pattern is set (S1010) to end the process. In addition, the second starting port open counter becomes "0" when the opening of the second starting port 21 (opening operation of the movable member 23) is performed three times during the time saving state, and if it is during the non-time saving state When the second starting port 21 is opened once, it becomes "0".

On the other hand, if the normal pattern per end flag is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 of the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended, so per normal pattern The end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the normal pattern per flag is turned OFF (S1012), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 20).

[Special figure action processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure operation process (S206) next to the normal figure operation process (S205). In the special figure operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. 27, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big winning device (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) is divided into five stages, "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage. Then, when the "special figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure operation status" is "2" (S1101 NO in S1103, YES in S1103), perform special symbol fluctuation processing (S1104), and if "special figure operation status" is "3" (NO in S1101, S1103, YES in S1105), special symbol confirmed When the processing (S1106) is performed and the "special figure operation status" is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103 and S1105, YES in S1107), special electric auditors processing 1 as a jackpot game (S1108) , and when the "special figure operation status" is "5" (S1101, S1103, S1105, S1107 are all NO), a special electric auditors process 2 (S1109) as a small winning game is performed. It should be noted that the special figure operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby process]
As shown in FIG. 28, in the special symbol standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) of the second starting port 21 is "0" (S1201). . If the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no storage of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the second start port 21, the first start It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) is "0" (S1206). Then, if the number of special-figure 1 reserved balls is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value obtained due to the entry into the first start port 20, the image It is determined whether or not the process of setting the display screen 7a of the display device 7 as a standby screen (executing a demo screen for customer waiting) is in progress (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), the process ends, Otherwise (NO in S1211), standby screen setting processing is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

In S1201, if the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the second start port 21 , Toku-zu 2 propriety determination processing (S1202), Toku-zu 2 variation pattern selection processing (S1203), Toku-zu 2 random number shift processing (S1204), Toku-zu 2 variation start processing (S1205) are performed in this order. Also, if the number of special 2 reserved balls is "0" but the number of special 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second start port 21 Although there is no memory, if there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the entry into the first starting port 20, special figure 1 validity determination processing (S1207) described later, special figure 1 fluctuation Pattern selection process (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order. Thus, in this embodiment 1, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure reservation is performed only when the second special figure reservation is "0" (YES in S1201). That is, digestion of the second special symbol reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over digestion of the first special symbol reservation (variation display of the first special symbol). And in the present embodiment 1, the win/loss determination based on the second special figure reservation is more likely to result in a big hit with a large profit for the player than the win/loss determination based on the first special figure reservation.

[Special figure 2 suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the first of the second special figure reservation The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol propriety determination random number counter (the oldest memory) stored in the corresponding RAM area) is read out (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the state is a high probability state (S1302). And if it is not a high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is a normal state, the normal Win/fail judgment is performed based on the big-hit judgment table for status (big-hit judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1303). On the other hand, if it is a high probability state (YES in S1302), the jackpot determination table for the high probability state corresponding to the game mode (for example, game mode 2) set out of the jackpot determination table (FIG. 9 (A)) Based on this, a decision is made (S1307). In the high-probability state jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", and "449". , "503". Further, although the detailed explanation is omitted, if the game mode is set to a game mode other than the game mode 2, it is based on the big hit determination table corresponding to the set game mode shown in FIG. It is assumed that the eligibility judgment is performed. The big hit determination value at that time is also as shown in FIG.

If the result of the jackpot determination (S1303, S1309) is determined to be a "jackpot" (YES in S1304), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS) is read and set as shown in FIG. The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table corresponding to the game mode (S1310), the jackpot pattern is determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (S1311), and the jackpot flag is turned on (S1312). ) to end the process. In addition, in the case of the success/failure determination related to the first special symbol, the big hit type is determined using the first special symbol jackpot type determination table, and in the case of the success/failure determination related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit in the winning/failure determination of the first special symbol (special figure 1), one of the 15R first big win, the 15R second big win and the 2R third big win is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is judged to be a big hit, it is all 15R fourth big hits (FIG. 8(B)).

The jackpot flags include a long jackpot flag that turns ON when the jackpot type is the 15R first jackpot or the 15R second jackpot, and a short jackpot flag that turns ON when the 2R third jackpot. Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of two LEDs, a lamp for 2R and a lamp for 15R, and when the 2R third big hit and the short hit flag are turned ON, the 2R third big win pattern. The 2R lamp is lighted and displayed at the timing when is displayed. Specifically, the display mode is such as "2R▲15RΔ" (for example, ▲: light on, Δ: light off). In addition, when one of the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, and the 15R fourth jackpot is achieved and the long hit flag is turned ON, the 15R lamp lights up at the timing when the corresponding jackpot pattern is confirmed and displayed. Is displayed. Specifically, the display mode is such as "2RΔ15R▴".

On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1307) is not a "big hit" (NO in S1304), it corresponds to the small hit determination table corresponding to the set game mode (for example, game mode 2) It is determined whether or not it is a small hit using a small hit determination table for small hits (S1305). That is, in the case of the game mode 2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol success/failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) matches any of the small hit determination values "101" to "105". (Fig. 9). Then, when it is determined that it is not a small hit (NO in S1305), the winning pattern is determined (S1308), and the process ends. If it is determined to be a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the small hit flag is turned ON (S1306), and the process is finished. In addition, a random number for determining whether or not the game is a small hit may be provided separately from the random number for judging whether or not the special symbol is appropriate.

[Tokuzu 2 variation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 28), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) next to the special figure 2 propriety determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is a time saving state (whether the time saving flag is ON) (S1401). Then, if it is not a time saving state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is a non-time saving state, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1402), and if it is ON (YES in S1402), the jackpot in the non-time saving state table (part of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 11 that corresponds to the non-time-saving state and the big hit) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1403) . It should be noted that if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, in the present embodiment 1, the table for big hits in the non-time-saving state is also divided according to whether the big hits are long hits (15R big hits) or short hits (2R big hits). However, since this process is a variation pattern selection process for the special figure 2, there is only the 15R fourth big hit (long hit) in the big hit that is won in the lottery of the special figure 2. Therefore, the portion referred to in this processing is always the long hit portion, and the variation pattern P1 or the variation pattern P2 is selected. In addition, the table for big hits in non-time-saving state does not need to be divided into the object for long hits, and the object for short hits. This is the same for the table for big hits in the time saving state, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S1405). Then, if the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1405), the table for non-time-saving state medium-small hit (part corresponding to non-time-saving state and small hit among the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), variation A variation pattern is selected based on the pattern random number counter value (S1409). Specifically, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern P4 is always selected.

Also, if the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1405), it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is the reach establishment random number (S1406). As shown in FIG. 8(C), the reach establishment random number is "0" to "5" in the time saving state, and "0" to "13" in the non-time saving state. That is, the time saving state is less likely to reach when it is off than the non-working time saving state. This is in order to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by making it possible to select more short reach production off with short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

If the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is a reach establishment random value (YES in S1406), that is, if the reach is out, the table for reach out during the non-time saving state (variation shown in FIG. 11 A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value by referring to the part corresponding to the non-time saving state and reach out of the pattern table (S1407). In Example 1, the variation pattern P5 or P6 is selected.

If the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is not a reach establishment random value (NO in S1406), that is, if there is no reach out, the reach non-outgoing table during the non-time saving state (variation pattern shown in FIG. 11 The part corresponding to the non-time saving state and no reach out of the table) is referred to, and the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1408). When this reach does not come off, the function of shortening variation according to the number of held balls works. That is, when the number of reserved balls in the special design is "3" or "4", a variation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time than when the number of reserved balls in the special design is "0" to "2" is selected. It is designed to be In Example 1, the variation pattern P7 or P8 is selected.

Also, in S1401, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (YES in S1401), as shown in FIG. The part of the table that corresponds to the time saving state), the processing (S1410 to S1416) is performed in the same flow as the above steps S1402 to S1609. That is, if it is a big hit, refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state in FIG. 11 and to the big hit, if it is a small hit, refer to the part corresponding to the time saving state in FIG. With reference to the part corresponding to the time saving state in FIG. to select a variation pattern.

In addition, in the variation pattern table during the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 11), the function of shortening variation according to the number of retained balls when no reach is out is the number of retained balls "2" It works when ~ "4". That is, shortening variation is more likely to be selected than during the non-time saving state. In addition, when a long hit is won among jackpots, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than during the non-time-saving state. That is, the variation pattern table during the time saving state is a table such that the average value of the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than the variation pattern table during the non-time saving state.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, other processing (S1404) shown in FIG. 30 is performed and this processing ends. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is one lower side (for example, when the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b consists of an address space corresponding to the address "0000" to "0003" , address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, set "0" to the highest address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, (when stored up to the upper limit number) RAM corresponding to the fourth of the second special figure reservation The area is cleared to 0 (S1503) and this process ends.

After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) of FIG. 28 is performed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. In the special symbol waiting process (S1102) of FIG. 28, when the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" and the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206) , Special figure 1 propriety determination process (S1207), Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), Special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), Special figure 1 variation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special figure 1 suitability determination process]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207), the process (S1601 to S1609) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 validity determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the special figure 1, in S1601, in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) Read out the stored random number counter value for special symbol suitability determination (label-TRND-A). Also, in the determination of the type of jackpot in S1608, there is a possibility that it is determined to be any of the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, and the 2R third jackpot (FIG. 10). As shown in the column of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in FIG. 10, the distribution rate of each big hit is determined by the game mode. When it is determined to be a 15R first big hit or a 15R second big hit in this big hit type determination, a long hit flag is turned ON as a big hit flag in step S1609. On the other hand, when it is determined to be the 2R third big hit, the short hit flag is turned ON as the big hit flag in S1609.

[Special figure 1 variation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this processing is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to special figure 1, if YES in S1702 (that is, if the jackpot flag is ON), the type of jackpot is 15R jackpot (either 15R first jackpot or 15R second jackpot). or) (S1703). And if it is a 15R jackpot (YES in S1703), refer to the 15R jackpot table during the non-time-saving state (the part corresponding to the non-time-saving state and long hit of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 11), and refer to the fluctuation pattern A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1704). Specifically, the variation pattern P1 or the variation pattern P2 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a 15R jackpot in S1703 (NO in S1703), that is, if it is a 2R third jackpot, the table for the 2R jackpot during the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving state and the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 11) The part corresponding to the short hit) is referred to, and a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1706). Specifically, the variation pattern P3 is selected.

Also, in this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, even if YES in S1712 (that is, if the jackpot flag is ON), the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (either 15R first jackpot or 15R second jackpot) (S1713). And if it is a 15R jackpot (YES in S1713), refer to the 15R jackpot table during the time saving state (the part corresponding to the time saving state and long hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 11), and the fluctuation pattern random number counter A variation pattern is selected based on the value (S1714). Specifically, one of the variation patterns P9 to P11 is selected.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a 15R jackpot in S1713 (NO in S1713), that is, if it is a 2R third jackpot, the table for the 2R jackpot in the time saving state (the variation pattern table shown in FIG. corresponding part) to select a variation pattern based on the variation pattern random number counter value (S1715). Specifically, the variation pattern P12 is selected.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, after selecting the variation pattern (S1704, S1706, S1709, S1710, S1711, S1714, S1715, S1718, S1719, S1720), other processing (S1705, FIG. 27) to finish this process. In other processing (S1705), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 1 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, (when the upper limit number is stored) RAM corresponding to the fourth one of the first special figure reservation The area is cleared to 0 (S1803) and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 28 is performed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol fluctuation]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the special symbol variation process (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 of FIG. 28, see FIG. 11) has passed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not passed (NO in S1901), the process ends. As a result, the variable display of the special symbols is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has passed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON (S1903), and if it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter is "0" ( S1905). If it is determined in S1905 that the variable probability counter is "0", the variable probability flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable probability flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and when it is determined that the variable probability counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

And in S1907, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S1907), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the time saving to count the number of fluctuation display times of the special symbol executed during the time saving state Decrease the value of the counter by 1 (S1908), determine whether the value of the time saving counter is "0" (S1909), if it is "0" (YES in S1909), turn off the time saving flag (S1910), Proceed to the processing of S1911. Also, when it is determined that the time saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907) and when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911. In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the variable display of the special symbols according to the determination result of the special symbol propriety determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is finished.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the 15R jackpot (either the 15R first jackpot, the 15R second jackpot, or the 15R fourth jackpot) (S2002). . In S2002, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the 15R jackpot (YES in S2002), the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot game is set to "15" (S2003), and in S2005. Go to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the type of jackpot is not the 15R jackpot (NO in S2002), that is, the jackpot type in this case is the 2R jackpot, so the value of the round counter is set to "2" ( S2004), and shift to the processing of S2005.

In S2005, a large winning opening opening pattern corresponding to the type of big hit is set (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006. Here, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is determined according to the type of the big win (see FIG. 6), and in this embodiment, the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening is fixed in a specific round. Specifically, in any jackpot, the second big prize opening 35 is opened and closed in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and the first big prize opening 30 is opened and closed in the 3rd to 15th rounds (if the jackpot is 3 or more rounds). It is assumed that On the other hand, in different types of big wins, there are cases where the opening and closing patterns (opening patterns) are different, although the same big winning hole (for example, the second big winning hole 35 in the first round) is opened and closed in a specific round.

That is, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening is determined for each type of big win. Specifically, if the 15R first jackpot is won, the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot is set, and the opening pattern for the 15R first jackpot is executed during execution of the 15R first jackpot game. . In addition, if the 15R second big win, the release pattern for the 15R second big win is set, if the 2R third big win, the open pattern for the 2R third big win is set, and if the 15R fourth big win, the 15R fourth big win is set. Set the opening pattern for the jackpot. Then, the corresponding big-hit release pattern is executed in each big-hit game.

In S2006, a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2006). The opening command is determined according to the type of jackpot, and corresponds to each jackpot such as opening command for 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot and 15R fourth jackpot), opening command for 2R third jackpot, etc. are provided respectively. The set opening command then causes the corresponding opening period to be executed. Also, in S2007, the opening period of the jackpot game is started (S2007), and the special figure operation status is set to "4" (S2008).

Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2001), then it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S2009). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S2009), the small hit open pattern is set (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011. Here, the opening pattern of the small hit is to open the second big winning hole 35 twice for 0.9 seconds each time. This is the same opening pattern as the 2R jackpot opening pattern. In S2011, in order to start the small winning game, set the opening command of the small winning game (S2011), start the opening period of the small winning game (S2012), and set the special figure operation status to "5" ( S2013). Then, the main control unit 80 transmits the set small winning opening command to the sub control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and the sub control unit that receives the small winning opening command. At 90, a predetermined game effect corresponding to the opening period is performed. In addition, in S2009, if it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2009), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, so the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2014) and the process is finished. .

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
As shown in FIG. 39, in the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108), first, it is determined whether the probability variation flag is ON (S2101), and if it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2101), the probability variation The flag is turned OFF (S2102), and then it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2103). In S2103, when it determines with a time saving flag being ON (it is YES at S2103), a time saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), and it transfers to the process of S2105. If it is determined as NO in S2101, the process proceeds to S2103 without turning off the probability variation flag, and if it is determined as NO in S2103, the process proceeds to S2105 without turning off the time saving flag. In other words, during execution of the jackpot game, it is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time saving state. In the present embodiment 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is also controlled to the low base state during execution of the big hit game.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the jackpot devices (the first jackpot device 31 and the second jackpot device 36) have been opened (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game. If it is determined that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), then whether or not the predetermined round is being executed, that is, the big winning opening determined for the predetermined round (first big winning opening or second big winning opening) (S2106). If it is determined in S2106 that the round is not being executed (S2106), then it is determined whether or not it is time to start the round (S2107). This is determined based on the opening pattern of the jackpot game set for each jackpot type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the first opening process of the first round after the opening period has ended. Further, if the first round has already started, it is determined whether the previous round has ended and a predetermined interval period has elapsed. Note that the round is also simply referred to as "R".

At S2107, when it is determined that it is time to start the round (YES at S2107), the round start command of the corresponding round is set (S2108), the big winning opening opening process is performed (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. As a result, the big winning hole is opened and a predetermined round is started. In S2108, a round start command that can specify the round to be started is set, such as "1R start command" for the start of the first round and "2R start command" for the start of the second round. . The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-controller 90 by the output processing of S201. In addition, in the big winning opening opening process of S2109, a jackpot opening pattern determined according to the type of the jackpot to be executed, which is determined in the round to be started, is started. In S2110, whether the round to be started is the V round (first round or second round), that is, to start is the second big winning hole 35 (also referred to as "V attacker") having a specific area 39 inside It is determined whether it is a round to be opened and a round to operate the movable piece 150 (putting the specific area 39 into a state where the game ball can pass) (S2110). In this embodiment, two rounds, the first round and the second round, are set as V rounds for operating the movable piece 150 .

If it is determined in S2110 that the round to be started is not the V round (first round or second round), that is, the third round or later (NO in S2110), the process ends. This may be determined by using the value of a round counter for each jackpot type, or may be determined by providing a round counter for counting the number of rounds to be executed separately. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2110 that the round to be started is the V round (first round or second round) (YES in S2110), the effective period of the specific area is set based on the predetermined specific area effective pattern. (S2111), the opening/closing operation of the specific area is started based on a predetermined specific area opening/closing operation pattern (S2112), and the process is finished. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2107 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2107), the process ends. Here, examples of cases where it is determined that it is not the round start time include during the opening period before the start of one round and during the interval period after the end of the round.

Here, in the V round, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON, the game state display 46 is set to a predetermined display mode, and the game state after the big win game is finished is highly probable. Notifies you of the situation. Specifically, the gaming state display 46 is composed of three LEDs "a1a2a3". In the first embodiment, in the normal state (low-probability state), the display mode is "a1□a2□a3□" (eg, □: off, ▪: on). Further, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a during the jackpot game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode of "a1, a2, a3," is set. Then, when the jackpot game ends and the game state is set to the high probability state, the display mode is set to "a1□a2□a3□". In addition, the lighting control timing of the game status indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the jackpot game, even if the game ball passes through the specific area, the display mode remains "a1□a2□a3□". , the display mode may be "a1, a2, a3," at the timing of shifting to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and "a1, a2, a3," at the timing of shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state. .

That is, in the later-described specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 42), the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the specific area 39) during the V valid period is detected, and the V flag is turned ON outside the V valid period (V invalid period), the V flag is not turned ON even if V passage is detected. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON at a predetermined timing. That is, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the high probability state (game state setting process (FIG. 36) to be described later). By doing so, the V flag is prevented from being turned ON based on V passage by fraudulent act, that is, it is prevented from being illegally set to a high probability state.

In addition, in the present embodiment 1, in the V effective period setting process (S2111), even when the 15R second big hit, the period (first period) for determining that the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid is set. However, as another aspect, in the case of the 15R second jackpot, the first period may not be set for the 1st R and the 2nd R. That is, in the case of the 15R second big hit, the 1st R and the 2nd R may be set in the second period. In the jackpot game related to the 15R second jackpot, the opening time of the second jackpot 35 is set to 0.1 seconds, which is extremely short, so there is no possibility that the game ball will enter the second jackpot 35. Although it is extremely low, if it is set in the second period, the V flag will not be turned ON even if the ball is hit by any chance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being turned on illegally, or from being turned on due to a rare ball entry. In this embodiment, the V rounds are the first round and the second round, but they may be set to other rounds, the V round may be set to only one round, or three or more rounds may be set. can be set to

At S2106, if it is determined that the round is in progress (YES at S2106), the number of balls entering the big winning slot in that round will reach the specified maximum number of balls entering (10 per round in the first embodiment). It is determined whether or not it has reached (S2113). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2113), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the round being executed (whether or not all opening patterns set for the round have been completed) (S2114). Then, if it is determined in S2114 that it is not the time to end the round (NO in S2114), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2113 that the specified number of balls (the number of balls in the round is 10) has been reached (YES in S2113), or the end of the round is reached in S2114 (the (YES in S2114), that is, if one of the two round end conditions is met, the process proceeds to S2115. At S2115, a round end command for the corresponding round is set (S2115), and the process proceeds to S2116. In addition, in S2115, a round end command that can specify the round to end is set, such as "1R end command" if the 1st round is ended and "2R end command" if the 2nd round is ended. . The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-controller 90 by the output process of S201. In S2116, a predetermined large winning opening closing process is executed (S2116), then the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2117), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2118). If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2118), the process ends to start the next round.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2118), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2119), and a jackpot ending effect is performed. Start (S2120). Then, the jackpot end flag is turned ON (S2121), and the process ends. In addition, the round counter becomes "0" when the round (round game) is executed 15 times in the case of a long hit (15R jackpot), and the round (round game) is set twice in the case of a short hit (2R jackpot). It becomes "0" when executed.

Also, if the jackpot end flag is ON in S2105 (YES in S2105), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether or not the execution time of the jackpot ending effect has passed (S2122), and the ending time If it has not passed (NO in S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has passed (YES in S2122), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2123), and the later-described game state setting process (S2124) is performed. Then, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2125), the special figure operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and the process is finished. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation process (FIG. 24).

[Game state setting process]
As shown in FIG. 40, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned ON in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35), which will be described later. In S2201, when it is determined that the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the variable probability flag is turned ON (S2202), the variable probability counter is set to "140" (S2203), and the V flag is turned OFF (S2204). , the process proceeds to S2205. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether or not the game state after the big win game is set to the high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is ON in the game state setting process.

In S2205, it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game (jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot. Then, if it is determined that it is not the 15R big hit, that is, the 2R third big hit (NO in S2205), then the game state before the big hit game, that is, the game state when the 2R third big hit is the time saving state or not. (S2208). When it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (NO in S2208), the processing is finished without turning ON the time saving flag. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a high probability state, a special symbol non-time saving state and a low base state (that is, a high probability low base state). This high-probability-low base state ends when any one of the following conditions is met: that the special symbol is displayed 140 times, or that the next big hit occurs.

On the other hand, in S2205, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game (jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2205), or in S2208, the game state when the 2R third jackpot is reached is a time saving state. (YES in S2208), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2206), the time saving counter is set to "140" (S2207), and the process ends. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a high probability state, a time-saving state of special symbols, and a high base state (that is, a high probability high base state). This high-probability/high-base state ends when any of the following conditions are satisfied: that the special symbol is displayed 140 times, or that the next big hit occurs.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the V flag is OFF in S2201 (NO in S2201), similarly to the above, it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game (jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot (S2209). Then, in S2209, if it is determined that it is not the 15R big hit, that is, it is the 2R third big hit (NO in S2209), then the game state before the big hit game, that is, the game state when the 2R third big hit is achieved is time saving. It is determined whether it is in the state (S2210). In S2210, when it is determined that it is not in the time saving state (NO in S2210), the processing ends without turning ON the time saving flag. Thereby, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a low probability state, a special symbol non-time saving state and a low base state (that is, a low probability low base state). On the other hand, in S2209, if it is determined that the finished jackpot game (jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2209), or in S22100, the gaming state when the 2R third jackpot is reached is a time saving state. (YES in S2210), the time saving flag is turned ON (S2211), the time saving counter is set to "100" (S2212), and the process ends. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a low probability state, a time-saving state of special symbols, and a high base state (that is, a low certainty high base state). This low-probability-high base state ends when any one of the following conditions is satisfied: that the special symbol is displayed 100 times, or that the next big hit occurs. Further, the time saving counter and the variable probability counter count the number of times of adding up the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the 2R third big hit occurs, the processing (S2208, S2210) for determining whether the game state before the big hit game is the time saving state is performed by the operation state of the time saving function before and after the big hit game, and the high base. This is to make the operating state of the function (open extension function) the same as the small hit. If these operating states are different between the small win and the 2R third big win, even if it is difficult to recognize which win is due to the opening pattern of the big winning opening, it is possible to determine which win (big win) depending on the subsequent operating state. or a small hit) is determined. This makes it difficult to discriminate between the small win and the 2R third big win by the opening pattern of the big winning hole, and also makes it difficult to discriminate by the operation state of the time saving function and the high base generating function that occur afterwards.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
As shown in FIG. 41, in the special electric auditors processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small-hit end flag is a flag indicating that all of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) have been opened in the small winning game. In S2301, if it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), whether the big winning hole (first big winning hole 30 or second big winning hole 35) is being opened, that is, for small winning It is determined whether the release pattern is being executed (S2302). When it is determined in S2302 that the large winning opening is not in the process of opening (NO in S2302), whether or not the time (timing) for opening the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) has come, that is, the opening of the small prize. After the period has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the time (timing) for starting a predetermined opening operation has arrived (S2303).

If it is determined in S2303 that it is not time to open the big winning slot (NO in S2303), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the big winning hole (YES in S2303), the V invalid period setting process is performed (S2304), and the second big winning hole follows the small winning opening pattern (see FIG. 7). 35 is opened (S2305), and the process ends. In the V invalid period setting process (S2304), the game ball detection by the specific area sensor 39a is invalidated during the opening of the second big winning hole 35 in the small winning game and for several seconds after the closing of the second big winning hole 35. A period (second period) for determination is set. Further, in the first embodiment, a period other than the period determined as the valid period in the V valid period setting process (S2111) is set as the invalid period (second period). Therefore, in this V invalid period setting process, it is confirmed whether the valid period is not reached, that is, whether the invalid period is set. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the V timer (provided in the RAM of the main control board 80), which counts down the elapse of the V valid period, is set to "0" (ie, no valid period). do. If the V timer is not "0", it is set to "0". The V timer is set to "0" without checking whether the V timer is "0". That is, it may be set to a state with no valid period. Thus, even if there is V passage during the small winning, if the game state before the small winning game is the normal state, the game state after the small winning game is not shifted to the high probability state. However, since the movable piece 150 that allows passage through the specific area 39 does not operate during the small winning game, the game ball will not pass through the specific area unless an unforeseen event (failure, malfunction, fraud, etc.) occurs. .

In S2302, when it is determined that the big winning hole (second big winning hole 35) is in the process of opening (YES in S2302), the number of balls entering the big winning hole during the small winning game is the specified maximum number of balls. It is determined whether or not the number (10 in the first embodiment) has been reached (S2306). If the specified number of entering balls has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is determined whether or not it is time to end the opening operation (whether or not all the opening patterns for small hits have been completed) (S2307). Then, when it is determined that the opening operation of the big winning hole has not ended (NO in S2307), the process is finished.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2306 that the number of balls entering the big winning opening during the small winning game has reached the specified number of entering balls (YES in S2506), or the opening operation of the big winning opening ends in S2307. When it is determined that it is time (YES in S2307), a predetermined large winning opening closing process is performed (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2311. That is, as the end condition of the small winning game, (1) that the opening operation specified in the small winning game being executed has been completed (for example, opening of 0.9 s twice) (2) small winning game being executed , two conditions are defined: that a prescribed number of game balls (eg, 10 balls) have entered. Then, when any one of the conditions is satisfied, the termination condition of the small winning game is satisfied based on the previously satisfied condition. In S2311, as a small-hit end processing for ending the small-hit game, the ending command of the small-hit game is set (S2311), the ending period of the small-hit is started (S2312), and the small-hit end flag is turned ON (S2313). ) to end the process. Here, in the small hit end processing in S2311, where the processing of setting the ending command is performed, the ending command for the small hit is set. The ending period for the small win is the same period as the ending period for the 2R third big win, which also makes it difficult to distinguish between the small win and the 2R third big win.

In S2301, if it is determined that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), then it is determined whether or not the ending period (ending time) of the small hit has passed (S2315), and the ending period has passed. If it is determined not (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2315, if it is determined that the ending period has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), the small hit flag is turned OFF (S2317), and the special figure operation status is set to "1 ” (S2318), and the process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special symbol operation process (FIG. 24). It should be noted that the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are not switched from ON to OFF at the start of the small winning game. Also, when the small winning game ends, the game state setting process (S2124, FIG. 33) is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state is not changed before and after the execution of the small winning game.

[Specific area sensor detection process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a specific area sensor detection process (S207) next to the special figure operation process (S206). In the specific area sensor detection process (S207), as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). If it is determined that there is no detection (NO in S2401), the process ends. If it is determined in S2401 that there is detection (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not it is during the V valid period (S2402). The V valid period is a period set in the V valid period setting process (S2111) in the above-described special electric accessory process 1 (FIG. 39). The V validity period is set in the first round and the second round in the jackpot game.

Also, if it is determined in S2402 that it is in the V valid period (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and whether or not the big hit game currently being executed is a 2R big win (2R third big win) (S2404). Then, if it is determined that it is not a 2R big hit (NO in S2404), that is, if it is a 15R big hit, the 1st V passage command is set (S2405), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a 2R big hit (YES in S2404), the second V passage command is set (S2406), and the process ends. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this V passing command to the sub-control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub-control board 90 displays the effect pattern according to the type of the received V passing command, the game state at that time, etc. A game effect is executed in an area or the like.

If it is determined in S2402 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2402), the invalid period passage command is set without turning on the V flag (S2407), and the process ends. In principle, the first V-passing command is a command for causing the sub-control board 90 to perform V-passing notification control. On the other hand, the second V-pass command is a command for in principle preventing the sub-control board 90 from performing notification control of V-pass. In addition, the invalid period passage command indicates that the game ball passed through the specific area during the invalid period of the specific area on the main control board 80 or the sub-control board 90 . That is, it is a command for notifying that there is a possibility that some trouble or fraud has occurred. This notification may be performed using the display screen 7a, frame lamps, board surface lamps, speakers, or the like, or may be performed in the hall computer by transmitting the information to the hall computer. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 executes such specific area sensor detection processing (S207) and V valid period setting processing (S2111), thereby switching means for switching between valid and invalid passage of the game ball to the specific area 39. It functions as (specific area state switching means).

[Starting ball entry process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the process (S208) at the time of starting entering the ball after the specific area sensor detection process (S207). As shown in FIG. 43, in the starting ball entry process (S208), first, the number of special 1 reserved balls, the number of special 2 reserved balls and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read. (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S2502). In S2502, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S2502), the process proceeds to S2503. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 2 reserved ball number at S307 in the starting opening sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second starting opening.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 pending balls has not increased (NO in S2502), the process proceeds to S2506. In S2503, read out the latest acquisition random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit ( S2503). Next, in S2504, the acquisition random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S2504). Specifically, the value of the special symbol success/failure determination random number counter (random number value for special symbol success/failure determination) obtained when entering the starting port depends on the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). Then, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss. Also, when the determination result (preliminary determination result) is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined. This is a pre-judgment (so-called "hold look-ahead").

In addition, the prior determination is a jackpot determination table corresponding to the set game mode (see FIG. 9A), and if it is a high probability state, the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, If it is a probability state), it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the big hit determination value based on the big hit determination table for the normal state. In addition, as another prior determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table that can determine variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for normal state (for low probability state) and for high probability state (for high probability state) and a variation pattern information determination table. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the obtained random number value (such as the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big win, the type of the big win, and whether or not a game effect with a high degree of reliability of the big win is to be executed.

Next, in S2505, game information including at least the number of held balls data related to the second special symbol read in S2501 and the information (predetermined information) pre-determined in S2504 is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command. , is set in the output buffer for command transmission to the sub-control board 90 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2505). In addition, as a special figure 2 start ball command, part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read in S2503 may be sent to the sub control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number is not sent as it is, but the game information (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information, etc.) obtained based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be sent.

In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether or not it is information related to the big hit, the number of pending balls of the second special symbol is how many, the big hit type , etc. can be identified by the sub-controller 90 . Also, in the first embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start ball command, whether the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low It is possible to specify whether or not a big hit will be achieved when judged in a probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit stores the received special figure 2 start ball command as a hold (production hold information), pre-determines the production hold information at a specific timing, and determines if it is correct or not in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether performance suspension information determined as a big hit is stored.

In addition, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number for determining whether the special symbol is right or wrong among the acquired random numbers read in S2503 is not sent as it is to the sub-control unit, and the value of the other random number counter for determining the jackpot type (jackpot Type determination random number), reach random number counter value (reach random number), variation pattern random number counter value (fluctuation pattern random number), and command data including information indicating the result of preliminary judgment It can be generated and set as a two-start entry command.

Then, in S2506, similarly to the processing related to the special figure 2 described above, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by "1" (S2506). In S2506, if it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by "1" (YES in S2506), the process proceeds to S2507. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the special figure 1 reserved ball number at S311 in the starting hole sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first starting hole. On the other hand, in S2506, when it is determined that the number of Toku-zu 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S2506), the process ends as it is.

In S2507, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON (S2507), and if it is determined that the time saving flag is ON, that is, in the high base state (YES in S2507), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2507, when it is determined that the time saving flag is OFF, that is, in the low base state (NO in S2507), the process proceeds to the pre-determination process after S2508. Here, if the time saving flag is ON, that is, if the current game state is a high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second start port 21 is operating, and the special figure 2 is valid or not Judgment is easy to make. In addition, in the first embodiment, digestion of special figure 2 reservation (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed with priority over digestion of special figure 1 reservation (variation display of the first special symbol) as will be described later. (So-called special figure 2 priority change machine). In such a configuration, for example, the pre-determination of special figure 1 is performed, the result is notified to the player by an effect such as a notice, and when the result of the pre-determination is clearly indicated as a big hit, the player Using the priority of special 2 pending digestion, intentionally eliminate special 2 pending (set to "0") at any time, and intend to hit the big hit according to special 1 with the result of pre-judgment shown It is possible to intervene technically to generate It is not preferable from the viewpoint of game fairness that the player can adjust the timing of occurrence of such a big win. Therefore, if the current gaming state is not the low base state but the high base state (YES in S2507), the processing related to the advance determination of special figure 1 after S2508 is not performed, and this processing is finished.

The processing of S2508-S2510 is to perform the processing similar to that of S316-S318 described above for special figure 1. That is, the latest acquisition random number (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the starting entrance sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (S2508), Pre-judgment is performed on the obtained random number read out (S2509), and game information including at least the number of held balls data related to the first special symbol read out in S2501 and the information pre-determined in S2509 (pre-determination information), It is generated as a special figure 1 start ball command and set in the output buffer for command transmission to the sub control board 90 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2510). It should be noted that the prior determination of S2509 (suspended prefetch) is performed prior to the validity determination (S1603, S1609) in the special figure 1 validity determination process (S1207) described later.

[Power off monitoring process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a power interruption monitoring process (S209) following the pending ball number process (S208). In the power-off monitoring process (S209), as shown in FIG. 44, first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal has been input (S2601). This is determined based on the "power-off signal" transmitted when the voltage drop monitoring circuit 105 detects a drop in the power supply voltage. If it is determined in S2601 that there is no power supply voltage input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, in S2601, if it is determined that there is an input of the power-off signal (YES in S2601), the game state information stored in the RAM of the main control unit 80, and the game state stored in the payout control unit 110 The information is stored in the backup area of each RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned ON (S2603), and then loop processing is performed without returning to the interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

In addition, as the game state information to be backed up to be stored in the backup area when the power cutoff signal is received, at least information indicating the set game mode (game mode setting information), special symbol status flag, normal symbol status flag , The value of the pending memory counter (special figure, normal figure), the value of the variable probability flag, the value of the time saving flag, the information indicating the progress of the big hit game, the information indicating the progress of the small hit game, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol, Information indicating the number of unpaid prize balls can be given. These game state information are saved (stored) in a backup area (backup RAM) in which power supply is maintained by a backup power source. In addition, these backed-up game state information can be changed to the control state (game state) when the power supply is started again after a power failure etc., and the control state (game state) when the power failure etc. state) is necessary information (data) to restore

[Mode setting monitoring process]
Next, the mode setting monitoring process (S210) will be described with reference to FIG. This mode setting monitoring process is a process of constantly monitoring the setting state of the mode setting switch while power is being supplied (after the game is started). In the pachinko game machine of this embodiment, the game mode setting can be changed only when the power is turned on and when the game machine is initialized. Even if the mode setting switch is operated (in the supply state), the game mode is not changed immediately. However, it is not preferable that the game mode actually set in the game machine and the game mode indicated by the operating portion 82a of the mode setting switch 82 do not match. Also, if there is such a mismatch, there is a risk that a game clerk or the like may misidentify the game mode set in the game machine when confirming the settings of the game machine. For example, there is a possibility that a change may be misunderstood as already changed even though the change is originally necessary.

In order to prevent such a situation, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by constantly monitoring the setting state (selection information) of the mode setting switch 82 (at each predetermined control cycle), the discrepancies as described above are detected. It is possible to notify the surroundings by promptly finding the error and performing a predetermined notification (error notification). Specifically, in the mode setting monitoring process (S210), first, the selection information of the mode setting switch is read (S3201), then the game mode corresponding to the read selection information, the game mode stored in the RAM, That is, the game mode currently set in the gaming machine is compared and determined (S3202). Then, in S3203, if it is determined that the results of the comparison performed in S3202 match (YES in S3203), it is determined whether an error is being reported (S3205), and if it is determined that an error is not being reported (S3205), processing Finish. This is the case if the setting state of the mode setting switch 82 is not erroneously or fraudulently changed after the start of the game.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3203 that the results of the comparison performed in S3202 do not match (NO in S3203), a predetermined error notification is made (S3204), and the process ends. In the error notification, an error display indicating that "the mode setting switch has been illegally operated" is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, or a predetermined error notification is performed by the board surface lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, or the speaker 67. It is possible to go Also, in the error notification, both the correct game mode setting and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch may be indicated in some manner. As a result, the game mode setting position by the mode setting switch 82 can be quickly corrected (restored), and the error notification can be ended. This error processing (error notification) is performed while maintaining a state in which the game can be continued. This is because the game mode cannot be changed (the game mode is not changed) unless the game machine is initialized.

Also, during this error notification (error processing), S3203 is executed again, and if it is determined that they match (YES in S3203), then it is determined whether or not the error is being reported (S3205), and it is determined that the error is being reported. If so (YES in S3205), the error notification is terminated (S3206), and the process ends. As a result, it is possible to return to a normal game without error notification. As a result, the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment monitors the operation of the mode setting switch 82 during power supply, and while the power supply is stopped, based on the restored game state information It is possible to monitor by determining whether or not the game mode matches the game mode at the time of power interruption. This makes it possible to prevent the game mode from being illegally or erroneously changed.

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIG. Incidentally, counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. appearing in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control section). When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads out and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 46 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. . As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, CPU initialization processing is first performed (S4001). In CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter resetting are performed.

Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether or not the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO at S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4011. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4011 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. FIG. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned ON but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. In S4011, initial processing for performing setting notification (notification processing) when there is a game mode setting change (to be described later) and operation confirmation (initial operation) of movable decorative members 14 and 17 (board movable portion and frame movable portion). is performed (S4011), and the process proceeds to S4004. Note that S4001 to S4003 and S4011 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . Incidentally, the effect determination random number includes a notice effect determination random number for determining the notice effect and a effect symbol determination random number for determining the effect symbol. The random number update method can be the same method as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Instead of adding 1 to the random value at the time of updating, it is also possible to add 2 at a time. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball command) is sent from the main control board 80 to notify that there is a starting ball, or when the main control board 80 sends a control signal ( When a variation start command) is transmitted, or when determining a variation effect pattern described later. The storage location of the obtained effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 . In the first embodiment, the random number for determining the advance notice of the character, the random number for deciding the step-up advance notice, the random number for deciding the pseudo-fluctuation notice, and the random number for deciding the advance notice of the moving part are provided as the notice effect determination random numbers. The announcement effect to be executed is determined by using the acquired value of the effect determination random number and each announcement determination table.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) ends, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100 , sound control board 106 and lamp control board 107 . Each control board (each control unit) that receives the command uses various production devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command to perform various Production (production pattern game production, special game production accompanying the big win game and small win game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, the display control of performance symbols and the like executed on the display screen 7a (the performance symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, the lighting control of various lamps, and the operation of the movable decorative members control, voice output control from a speaker, and the like can be performed.

[Initial processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48, the initial processing (S4011) executed when the power is turned on will be described. This initial processing (S4011) is processing that is executed when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In addition, in the initial processing, mainly, setting notification on the display screen 7a (effect pattern display portion 7b) when the setting is changed, and initial operation of the movable decorative members 14 and 17 (frame movable portion and board movable portion). and is executed. In addition, when the setting is changed, the execution timing of the setting notification is changed so that the visibility is not hindered by the initial operation of the movable decorative members 14 and 17 (the frame movable portion and the board movable portion). are made different from those where they are not made.

Specifically, in the initial processing (S4011), first, it is determined whether or not a setting change command has been received from the main control unit 80 (S4101). In S4101, if it is determined that a setting change command has been received, that is, the setting has been changed under the control of the main control unit 80 (set to a setting change state) (YES in S4101), the A setting notification command is transmitted (S4102), a frame movable initial operation start command for executing the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is transmitted (S4103), and the process proceeds to S4104. By transmitting the setting notification command, the sub control unit 90 executes the setting notification (setting change notification) on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit) via the image control unit 100 (image control board). perform display control for The mode of execution of the setting notification (setting change notification) in this embodiment is the mode shown in FIG. 50(a). It shows what has been done. Further, instead of such a mode, specifically, which game mode has been set, which game mode has been changed to which game mode, and the like may be displayed.

Also, by transmitting a frame movable initial operation start command, the sub-controller 90 starts the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) via the lamp control board 107 . The movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is provided with a piece to be detected (not shown) that rotates together with the rotational movement of the movable decorative member. In the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17, the driving source (stepping motor) is controlled to rotate the movable decorative member 17 by 1800 degrees (5 rotations) around the rotation axis. The operation mode is set to stop at the position detected by the sensor 17b (predetermined initial operation mode). It should be noted that the execution period of the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 is assumed to be completed in 8 seconds if there is no malfunction (malfunction of the mechanism or sensor). Further, the initial motion of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is simply a rotational motion at the position where the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is installed. Therefore, the movable decorative member 17 does not move to a position overlapping the display screen 7a for setting notification in the process of executing the initial operation. notification) visibility is not hindered.

As a result, in the present embodiment, the notification of setting, which is executed after the power is turned on, and the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) are executed in parallel (see FIG. 49A). In addition, by enabling these to be executed in parallel, the initial operation can be quickly finished (completed), the game machine can be quickly put into a playable state, and the confirmation time of the initial processing by the game clerk can be shortened. To increase the operation rate of a game machine. Further, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the initial motion of the movable decorative member 14 (the board movable portion) is such that at least part of the movable decorative member 14 In order to pass through (locate or move) a position overlapping the display screen 7a displaying the setting notification, if the setting notification and the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 are executed simultaneously (in parallel), the setting There is a possibility that the visibility of the notification may be hindered. Therefore, as will be described later, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (the board movable portion) is executed after the setting notification is executed for a predetermined time (5 seconds) (after the setting notification is completed). and When the board movable initial operation shown in FIG. 50(b) is completed and the initial processing is completed, the display mode shown in FIG.

In S4104, it is determined whether 5 seconds (specific notification time) have passed since the start of the setting notification, and if it is determined that 5 seconds (specific notification time) have not passed (NO in S4104), S4104 is determined again. I do. Then, in S4104, when it is determined that the execution time (execution period) of setting notification has passed 5 seconds (specific notification time) (YES in S4104), the process proceeds to S4105. A timer means for measuring the execution time of the setting notification is provided, and it is determined whether or not the execution time of the setting notification has reached the specific notification time by determining the time value of the timer means. In addition, in this embodiment, 5 seconds is set as the specific notification time. , may be other lengths (longer or shorter) of time. Also, during the period in which this setting notification is being performed, the frame movable initial operation is being performed in parallel.

In S4105, it is determined whether or not the frame movable initial operation executed in parallel with the notification of setting has ended (S4105). In this embodiment, since the frame movable initial motion time (8 seconds) is set longer than the specific notification time (5 seconds), the initial determination is that the frame movable initial motion has not ended. . If it is determined in S4105 that the frame movable initial motion has not ended, that is, that the detected piece has not yet been detected by the origin sensor 17b after the predetermined initial motion has been executed (NO in S4105), then the frame It is determined whether or not a set time (limit time set for the frame movable initial motion) has passed since the start of the movable initial motion. This is because if a failure or malfunction (damage, foreign matter, etc.) occurs in the drive source, drive mechanism, origin sensor, or the like, the origin sensor 17b will detect the piece to be detected no matter how much time elapses after the start of the initial operation. In other words, there is a risk that the initial operation will not be completed.

In order to prevent such a situation, a time longer than the frame movable initial operation time (8 seconds) set for the frame movable initial operation is set as a set time (limit time), and this set time (in this embodiment, (set to 12 seconds)), if the frame movable initial operation is not completed, an error notification is executed, and the next process is performed. Specifically, when it is determined in S4107 that the set time (12 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the frame movable initial operation (YES in S4107), frame movable error notification is executed (S4108), and the process proceeds to S4106. In the frame movement error notification, characters of "frame movement error" are displayed on the display screen 7a to notify that there is some problem with the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S4107 that the set time (12 seconds) has not elapsed from the start of the frame movable initial motion (NO in S4107), it is determined again whether the frame movable initial motion has ended (S4105). If it is determined that the frame movable initial operation has been completed after performing the determination of S4105 a plurality of times (YES in S4105), then a board movable initial operation start command is transmitted (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4109. That is, after the setting notification of the specific setting notification time is completed and the frame movable initial operation is completed (or the set time passes without being completed), the board movable initial operation is started. As a result, it is possible to terminate the setting notification of the specific notification time (5 seconds) and the initial operation of moving the frame before executing the initial operation of moving the board, which covers part of the display portion of the display screen 7a. becomes. In addition, this prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that the setting has been changed from being hindered by the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (plate movable portion), and reliably notifies that the setting has been changed. It becomes possible to

Also, since the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is completed before the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (plate movable portion) is started, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (plate movable portion) is completed. Before the start of , the time for setting notification is surely secured, the initial operations of the movable decorative member 14 and the movable decorative member 17 are separately executed, and the respective initial operations can be surely executed. In addition, it is possible to prevent, as much as possible, the occurrence of a situation in which a large number of movable decorative members 14 and 17 operate at the same time and the driving power becomes insufficient. In addition, the frame movable initial operation that does not impede the visibility of the setting notification can be executed in parallel after the setting notification, so that the initial processing can be completed as quickly as possible and the game can be played quickly. make it possible.

In S4109, it is determined whether or not the initial movement of the board has ended (S4109). If so (NO in S4109), then it is determined whether or not a set time (limit time set for the initial movement of the board) has elapsed since the start of the initial movement of the board. As with the frame movable initial operation described above, if a failure or malfunction (damage, entry of foreign matter, etc.) occurs in the drive source, drive mechanism, origin sensor, etc., how much time has passed after the start of the initial operation. This is because the origin sensor 17b does not detect the piece to be detected, that is, the initial operation may not be completed.

In order to prevent such a situation, a set time (limit time) longer than the board movable initial operation time (6 seconds) determined for the board movable initial operation is set, and this set time (in this embodiment, (set to 9 seconds)), if the board movement initial operation is not completed, an error notification is executed, and the next process is performed. Specifically, when it is determined in S4110 that the set time (9 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the initial movement of the board (YES in S4110), a board movement error notification is executed (S4111), and the initial processing ends. In the board movement error notification, characters "board movement error" are displayed on the display screen 7a to notify that there is some problem with the movable decorative member 14 (board movable portion). On the other hand, if it is determined in S4109 that the board movable initial operation has ended (YES in S4109), the initial processing ends.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 49A [With setting change: initial process] is a diagram showing the approximate timing of the initial process executed when it is determined in S4101 that the setting change command has been received. According to this, the setting notification (t1→t2) and the frame movable initial operation (t1→t3) are executed (started) in parallel, and after both the setting notification and the frame movable initial operation are completed, the board movable initial operation is performed. It indicates that (t4→t5) is started.

In S4101, the setting change command is not received, that is, if it is determined that the setting change is not performed under the control of the main control unit 80 (not set to the setting change state) (NO in S4101), the game mode Executes the [no setting change processing (S4112)] for executing the initial processing when the setting has not been changed, and ends the processing. When the setting change command is not received, the sub-controller 90 does not notify the setting on the display screen 7a. As a result, it is possible to quickly end the initial processing when there is no change in the setting of the game mode.

In the no setting change processing (S4112), first, a frame movable initial operation start command for executing the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is transmitted (S4201), and then the movable decorative member 14 (plate movable section) is transmitted (S4202), and the process proceeds to S4203. Through S4201 and S4202, the movable decorative member 14 and the movable decorative member 17 start their initial operations in parallel. When it is determined that the setting change command has not been received (the setting change state is not set), the setting notification is not performed on the display screen 7a controlled by the sub-controller. frame movable initial operation and board movable initial operation are executed all at once (in parallel).

This is because no notification of setting is made on the display screen 7a, so even if the initial movement of the board that can cover the display screen 7a is started immediately, the visibility of the notification of setting is not hindered. As a result, the initial processing (initial operation) that is executed when the setting of the game mode is not changed can be quickly terminated, and the game can be put into a playable state as quickly as possible. In S4203, it is determined whether or not the frame movable initial motion has ended (S4203). If it is determined that it has not ended (NO in S4203), then the set time (limit time) has elapsed since the frame movable initial motion started. (S4204). If it is determined in S4204 that the set time has not elapsed, it is determined again whether the frame movable initial operation has ended, and if it is determined that the set time has elapsed, frame movement error notification is executed, to process. Also, these processes (S4203-S4205, S4206-S4208) are the same as the processes executed when the above-described setting change command is received. If it is determined in S4206 that the board movable initial operation has ended (YES in S4206), the process ends.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 49B [no setting change: initial process] shows the approximate timing of the initial process executed when it is determined in S4101 that the setting change command has not been received. According to this, the setting notification is not executed, the frame movable initial operation (t6→t8) and the board movable initial operation (t6→t7) are executed (started) in parallel, and the frame movable initial operation and the board movable initial operation are executed. This indicates that the initial processing is terminated after both of are completed.

[Other Aspect 1 of Initial Processing]
Next, another aspect 1 of the initial processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 53(AA). The description of the parts common to the initial processing of the first embodiment is omitted, and the differences are described. In the aspect of the first embodiment described above, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (the initial operation for moving the board) is performed after both the notification of setting and the initial operation for moving the frame are completed. Instead of this aspect, in another aspect 1, the board movable initial operation is started (without waiting for the end of the frame movable initial operation) after the setting notification of the specific notification time (5 seconds) is completed. and

Specifically, since S4151 to S4154 of the other aspect 1 (S4011) of the initial processing shown in FIG. 51 are the same as the initial processing of the first embodiment, description thereof will be omitted. If it is determined in S4154 that the specific notification time (5 seconds) has passed since the start of the setting notification (YES in S4154), then a board movable initial operation start command is transmitted (S4155), and the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 is started. Start. Then, in S4156 to S4158, end processing of frame movable initial operation is performed, and in S4159 to S4160, end processing of board movable initial operation is performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 53(AA) [setting change: initial processing], after the setting notification (tt1→tt2) for a predetermined period (5 seconds) is completed, the frame movable initial operation (tt1→tt4) is performed. If it is being executed, without waiting for the end of the frame movable initial operation, the board movable initial operation (tt3→tt5) is started in parallel with the frame movable initial operation, and the frame movable initial operation and the board movable initial operation are started. is completed, the initial processing is terminated. As a result, it is possible to finish the initial processing as quickly as possible and bring the gaming machine into a playable state without impairing the visibility of the setting notification by the initial movement of the board.

[Other Aspect 2 of Initial Processing]
Next, another aspect 2 of the initial processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53 (AAA). The description of the parts common to the other aspect 1 described above will be omitted, and the differences will be described. In Example 1 and another aspect 1 described above, when the setting notification of the specific notification period (5 seconds) is completed, the setting notification is finished and other processing is performed. Instead of this aspect, in another aspect 2, even after executing the setting notification of the specific notification period (5 seconds), the setting notification is continued, and other initial processing (frame movable initial operation and / or board In accordance with the end of the movable initial operation), the setting notification is ended. As a result, it is possible for the game mode setter or the like to reliably perform the setting notification by the setting notification.

Specifically, since S4151 to S4154 of another aspect 2 (S4011) of the initial processing shown in FIG. 52 are the same as the initial processing of another aspect 1, description thereof will be omitted. Here, in S4154, if it is determined that the specified notification time (5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the setting notification (YES in S4154), the setting notification is continued without ending (even if the display mode is changed It does not matter), and transmits a board movable initial operation start command for starting the board movable initial operation (S4155). Further, since S4156 to S4161 are the same as the initial processing of the other aspect 1, description thereof will be omitted. In another aspect 2, when it is determined in S4159 that the panel movable initial operation has ended (YES in S4159), a setting notification end command for ending the continuously executed setting notification on the display screen 7a is sent (S4162), and the initial processing ends. That is, in another mode 2, as shown in FIG. 53 (AAA) [with setting change: initial processing], setting notification (s1→s5) and frame movable initial operation (s1→s4) are started in parallel, and , and after setting notification of the specific notification period (5 seconds), the board movable initial operation (s3→s5) is started. Then, even after the start of the board movable initial operation, the setting notification is continued on the display screen 7a, and when the board movable initial operation (the frame movable initial operation and the board movable initial operation) is completed (as a trigger), It is assumed that the setting notification is terminated and the initial processing is terminated.

As a result, the setting notification execution time is extended without extending the execution time of the initial processing, and the game mode setter or the like can reliably perform the setting notification. In addition, in the initial movement of the board, the movable decorative member 14 partially covers the display screen 7a during a part of the initial movement, but does not cover the entire display screen 7a, and always covers the display screen 7a during the initial movement. I don't know. Therefore, if the setting notification is performed during the period of the initial movement of the board, although there is a timing when the visibility of the setting notification is hindered, there is also a timing when it becomes visible, and it is possible to effectively perform the setting notification. is. In addition, before the start of the panel movable initial operation, a mechanism for performing setting notification without obstructing visibility is ensured, so it is possible to more reliably perform setting notification that is easy to recognize. In addition, this makes it possible to finish the initial process as quickly as possible and bring the gaming machine into a playable state without impairing the visibility of the setting notification by the initial movement of the board.

[Other Aspects of Initial Processing]
Moreover, both the frame movable initial operation and the board movable initial operation may be started after the end of the setting notification (after the specific notification time has elapsed). As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the user of the setting without fear that the visibility of the setting notification will be hindered by the operation of the decorative movable member. Also, at this time, the frame movable initial operation and the board movable initial operation may be executed in parallel, or one of them may be executed first and the other later. In addition, the initial operation of the movable decorative member refers to the operation (driving source and operating mechanism) of the movable decorative member and the detection sensor for controlling the position. This is an operation for moving (positioning) the movable decorative member portion to the initial position (original position) (at the start of the game). Such processing is also referred to as origin return operation.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment described above determines whether or not the initialization flag is ON in the mode setting process (S3101) subsequent to the initial setting process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 14). When it is ON, that is, when the game machine is initialized (RAM is initialized) and started up (activated), the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is read, and the game mode corresponding to the selection information is set. allowed to change. On the other hand, when the initialization flag is not ON, that is, when the game state (control state) at the time of power failure is restored based on the game state information stored in the backup areas (161, 162), the mode setting switch 82 The selection information of is being read. As a result of performing recovery processing based on the game state information stored in the backup areas (161, 162), the game mode at the time of power failure stored in the RAM of the main control unit 80 and the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 If the game mode is different from the corresponding game mode, in addition to not changing the setting of the game mode, error processing (error notification) is performed. Also, until this error processing is completed, that is, until a match is determined in the match determination, the interrupt process (S105) is not performed and the game cannot be started.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment as described above, although the effect against fraud is extremely high, there is a possibility that the operation rate of the gaming machine may be lowered because the game is not started until it is determined that there is a match. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the second embodiment, in the mode setting process, as in the first embodiment, only when the initialization flag is ON when the power is turned on, that is, when the game machine is initialized and started up The selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is read, and the setting change to the game mode corresponding to the selection information is made possible. On the other hand, when the initialization flag is OFF, unlike the first embodiment, the mode setting process is terminated as it is. As a result, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the game machine, the setting of the game mode can be changed, and when the power is turned on without the initialization of the game machine, the setting of the game mode cannot be changed. However, even if the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is changed, such a situation is not monitored and error processing is not performed. As a result, the game is started in the same game mode as when the power was cut off when the power was turned on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, in the mode setting process (S106) of the second embodiment, first, whether or not the initialization flag is ON, that is, when the power is turned on, the RAM (161, 162) is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch 83. is initialized (S3191). At S3191, when it is determined that the initialization flag is ON (YES at S3191), the selection information of the mode setting switch is read (S3192), the game mode corresponding to the read selection information is set (S3193), and the processing is performed. finish. In this way, by operating the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on, when the RAM including the backup area is initialized and the game machine is started, the selection information (setting change operation) of the mode setting switch is validated. By doing so, it is possible to change (set) the game mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3191 that the initialization flag is not ON (NO in S3191), the process ends. The game modes that can be set by this mode setting process are the same game modes 1 to 5 as in the first embodiment. Other than that, the structure and control processing of the game machine are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

As a result, when the game is started, the game mode corresponding to the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 may differ from the actual game mode set in the game machine. However, since the game mode setting can be changed only when the game machine is initialized and the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent unnecessary (illegal) change of the game mode setting as much as possible. At the same time, by making it possible to start a game, it is possible to prevent the operation rate of the gaming machine from being lowered. In addition, after the start of the game, a mismatch between the actually set game mode and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch 82 is monitored by executing the mode setting monitoring process of the first embodiment. It is also possible to

Next, the game machine of Example 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. FIG. The gaming machine of Example 1 can set any game mode selected from game modes 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 9 by operating the mode setting switch 82 under specific change conditions. and The gaming machine of Example 3 selects and determines a game mode in a selection manner different from that of Example 1. FIG. Specifically, the gaming machine of Example 3 includes three types (plurality) of game mode selection means (game mode setting means) as game mode selection means for selecting a game mode. First, as in the first embodiment, using the mode setting switch 82, the game mode setting person selects and sets an arbitrary game mode from a plurality of game modes (first game mode). mode selection means). Secondly, it has game mode random selection means (second game mode selection means, random selection means) for randomly selecting and setting a game mode from a plurality of predetermined game modes. Thirdly, game mode fixed selection means (third game mode selection means, specific probability selection means) for setting the game mode to a predetermined specific game mode is provided.

In addition, the gaming machine of Example 3 has (is mounted on) a setting type switch 820 on the main control board 80, as shown in FIG. Under specific conditions, by sliding the operating portion 820a of the setting type switch 820 in the left-right direction, it is possible to select an arbitrary setting type (game mode selection means). Specifically, when [A] on the left end is selected with the operation unit 820a, the game mode arbitrary selection means (first game mode selection means) is selected as the game mode selection means. Also, when the center [B] is selected with the operation unit 820a, the game mode random selection means (second game mode selection means) is selected as the game mode selection means. Further, when [C] on the right end is selected with the operation unit 820a, the game mode fixed selection means (third game mode selection means) is selected as the game mode selection means.

When a game mode selection move is selected as a game mode selection means, a game mode setter such as a game clerk can set an arbitrary game mode. It is necessary to set and arrange a game machine in a high setting game mode with a high jackpot probability and a game machine in a low setting game mode with a low jackpot probability in a well-balanced manner. In addition, when the game mode random selection means is selected as the game mode selection means, the game mode setter such as the game clerk cannot grasp which game mode is set, and the game shop side makes it difficult to manage profits. However, since there is a possibility that a high setting game mode is set for the player, the expectation of the player, the interest in the game, and the gambling property are increased, and the operating rate of the game machine is improved. It will also be possible to increase the profit of Further, when the fixed game mode selection means is selected as the game mode selection means, a predetermined specific game mode is set. In the third embodiment, in consideration of the profit balance between the game parlor side and the player side, when the game mode fixed selection means is selected, the game mode 2, which is an intermediate setting, is set. As a result, although it is difficult for the amusement arcade to obtain a large profit, it is possible to obtain a relatively well-balanced profit without a large loss. On the other hand, from the player's point of view, it is possible to play a well-balanced, moderately gambling gaming machine with a low possibility of excessive profit or loss.

Next, the mode setting process (S106) of Example 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG. The description of the same part as the mode setting process (S106) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 is omitted. In the mode setting process (S106) of the third embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag is ON (S3101). NO), and move to the processing of S3112. Since the processing from S3112 to S3119 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the explanation is omitted.

On the other hand, in S3101, if the initialization flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the gaming state information has been initialized by performing a predetermined input operation to the RAM clear switch (YES in S3101), then the mode setting key It is determined whether it is ON, that is, whether the mode setting lock portion 92 is ON (S3102). If it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting lock portion 92 is in the OFF state, that is, the setting key has not been operated (NO in S3102), the process proceeds to S3111. Since the processing of S3111 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the explanation is omitted.

If it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting lock unit 92 is in the ON state, that is, that the setting key has been operated (YES in S3102), then a random number for setting change is acquired (S3149), and the mode of S3150 is changed. Go to setting process 2 (S3150). Here, the "setting change random number" is a random number used when the game mode random selection means is selected as the game mode selection means. This setting change random number is composed of a counter value that is updated at a predetermined cycle after the power is turned on, and the counter value obtained at the execution timing of S3149 is called a setting change random number.

In the mode setting process 2 (S3150), first, the selection information of the setting type switch is read (S3151), and then it is determined whether or not the setting type selected by the setting type switch 820 is the setting type A (game mode arbitrary selection means). (S3152). The CPU of the main control section 80 determines the setting type selected by the operation section 820 a of the setting type switch 820 . At S3152, when it is determined that the setting type selected by the operation section 820a of the setting type switch 820 is [A] (YES at S3152), a setting type A flag indicating that the game mode has been set by the game mode optional selection means. is turned ON (S3152), and the process proceeds to S3154. The processing of S3154 to S3159, specifically, the processing of setting an arbitrary game mode during the "game mode change state" is the same as the processing of the first embodiment, so the explanation is omitted. As a result, the game mode setter such as a game clerk operates the operation portion 82a of the mode setting switch 82 to set an arbitrary game mode selected from the game modes 1 to 5. FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3152 that the setting type selected by the setting type switch 820 is not the setting type A (NO in S3152), then the setting type selected by the setting type switch 820 is the setting type B (game Mode random selection means) is determined (S3162). At S3162, when it is determined that the setting type selected by the operation section 820a of the setting type switch 820 is [B] (YES at S3162), a setting type B flag indicating that the game mode has been set by the game mode random selection means. is turned ON (S3163), and the process proceeds to S3164. At S3164, the game mode is set based on the setting change random number obtained at S3149 (S3164), and information indicating that the game mode is randomly set by the game mode random selection means is displayed on the information display section 88. (S3165), and the process proceeds to S3169. As a result, a game mode randomly selected from game modes 1 to 5 is set regardless of the intention of a game mode setter such as a game clerk.

Here, "set the game mode based on the obtained random number for setting change" means that the random number for setting change consists of values from 0 to 99, and the obtained random number for setting change is from 0 to 99. If it is 19, set to game mode 1, if the obtained random number for setting change is 20 to 39, set to game mode 2, and if the obtained random number for setting change is 40 to 59, set to game mode 3 If the random number value for setting change obtained is 60-79, the game mode 4 is set, and if the random number value for setting change obtained is 80-99, the game mode 5 is set. In addition, the "information indicating that it has been set randomly" displayed in S3165 is, for example, the characters [RAND] (indicating random) being displayed using the 7-segment display units of the first to fourth information display units. may In addition, in the case of random setting, the set game mode is not displayed because the game clerk, etc. confirms that the game mode has been set to a game mode that is disadvantageous to the game store, and sets the game mode that is convenient for him/herself. This is to prevent the random setting from being repeated by repeatedly turning the power ON/OFF until the random setting is completed. This makes it possible to maintain fairness between the player side and the game parlor side when the game mode is set by the game mode random selection means.

Also, in S3162, if it is determined that the setting type selected by the operation section 820a of the setting type switch 820 is not [B], that is, the selected setting type is [C] (NO in S3162), the game mode is fixed. The setting type C flag indicating that the game mode has been set is turned ON by the selection means (S3166), and the process proceeds to S3167. In S3167, game mode 2, which is a predetermined fixed game mode, is set (S3167), the game mode (game mode 2) set in the information display section 88 is displayed (S3168), and the process proceeds to S3169. . The display mode of the information display section is [--F2], where F is information indicating a fixed FIX. As a result, a game mode setter such as a game clerk cannot select an arbitrary game mode, and the game mode 2 is forcibly set.

At S3169, it is determined whether or not the mode setting key is OFF, that is, whether or not the setting key inserted into the mode setting lock has been returned to the OFF position (S3169). , the process proceeds to S3160. If it is determined in S3169 that the game has not been returned to the OFF position (NO in S3169), the process of S43169 is repeatedly executed and the "playable state" is not entered. In S3160, the mode change flag is turned OFF to end the "game mode change state" (S3160), the setting change flag is turned ON (S3161), the setting type specifying command is set (S3170), and the process is finished.

Here, in the third embodiment, it is determined by the "setting change flag" that the backed-up gaming state information has been erased (initialized) and the game mode setting has been changed, and by the "setting type specifying command", the It is possible to discriminate in which kind of setting the setting of the game mode is changed. Further, in the third embodiment, based on the "setting type specifying command", which setting type the game mode is set to is notified. As described above, the display mode on the information display section 88 when the game mode is set differs depending on which type of setting the game mode is set. By looking at , it is possible to confirm which type of setting is used.

In addition, it is assumed that the game player is notified of which type of setting the game mode is set to by the "setting type specifying command". For example, using a frame lamp, a board surface lamp, or an image display device provided on the front side of the gaming machine, it is possible to notify the setting type in a identifiable (predictable) notification manner. For example, by changing the light emission color, light emission pattern, blinking speed, etc. of the lamp, by changing the background color, background type, display characters, characters, etc. of the liquid crystal, by changing the sound output from the speaker, It is possible to specify (predict) which type of setting the game mode is set to. In addition, this notification mode that can specify the set type continues at least until the game is started (variation display of the first special symbol) after the setting of the game mode is changed. Alternatively, the "setting type specifying command" may be transmitted to the sub-controller 90 at a predetermined timing, and the display section or speaker controlled by the sub-controlling section 90 may notify the user that the setting type can be specified. Of course, a display unit that can be controlled by the main control unit 80 may be used to notify the user of the specified type of setting.

As another aspect, at least, after changing the setting of the game mode, it may be continued until the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). As another aspect, at least, it may be continued until a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) elapses after the setting of the game mode is changed. Also, by combining these modes, the notification may be ended based on whichever condition is met first. As a result, if there is a game machine whose settings have been changed, it is possible to notify the player who plays the game machine for the first time after the opening of the amusement arcade, in which setting type the setting of the game machine has been changed. becomes. As a result, the player can select the gaming machine on which he or she will play based on the information, and it is possible to increase the number of players immediately after the opening of the arcade.

As described above, the setting type switch 820 is operated with the power turned off. Then, the power is turned on in a state in which an arbitrary setting type (A to C) is selected by operating the operation section 820a. As a result, it is possible to select a game mode according to any setting type. In addition, in order to change the setting of the game mode with an arbitrary setting type, as in the first embodiment, the setting type is selected while the power is off, the mode setting lock is turned on, and the RAM is changed. The power must be turned on while the clear switch is turned on.

As a result, the game mode can be set in a wide variety of manners, and the player is more interested in selecting the gaming machine to play according to the setting manner of the game parlor. This also enhances the amusement of the game.

Next, the game machine of Example 4 will be described with reference to FIG. Although the gaming machine of the first embodiment includes a notification unit that notifies the mode of power-on (initialization and no setting change, initialization and setting change, or initialization and no setting change), the notification by the notification unit Aspects were primarily for the game clerk who turned the power on. In the fourth embodiment, in addition to this, it is possible to inform the player of the power-on mode (initialization and no setting change, initialization and setting change, or initialization and no setting change).

As shown in the power-on notification process (S107) of the fourth embodiment in FIG. set (S5108) and proceed to the processing of S5103. Further, following S5106, a display command for notifying that "initialization and setting change have been made" is set (S5109), and the process proceeds to S5103. In addition, after S5107, set a display command for notifying that "not initialized nor changed settings (game state information restored)" (S5110), and proceed to the processing of S5103. ing. Since other processes are the same as those of the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

In the fourth embodiment, a display command for notifying that "initialization has been performed but settings have not been changed" and a display command for notifying that "initialization has been performed and settings have also been changed" are performed by control processing (not shown). or a display command for notifying that "the game state information has not been initialized and the settings have not been changed (the game state information has been restored)" to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing, A display unit or a speaker controlled by the sub-control unit 90 may be used to notify the user of the power-on state in a identifiable manner. That is, different notification modes are executed depending on the power-on mode. Of course, a display unit that can be controlled by the main control unit 80 may be used to notify the user of the specified type of setting.

Also, in order to notify the player, this notification mode should be continued at least until the game is started after the setting of the game mode is changed (the first variable display of special symbols). As another aspect, at least, after changing the setting of the game mode, it may be continued until the variable display of the special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). As another aspect, at least, it may be continued until a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) elapses after the setting of the game mode is changed. Further, by combining these modes, notification may be ended based on whichever condition is established first. As a result, if there is a game machine whose settings have been changed, it is possible to inform the player who plays the game machine for the first time after the opening of the amusement arcade, in which setting type the setting of the game machine has been changed. becomes. As a result, the player can select the gaming machine in which he or she will play based on the information, and it is possible to increase the number of players immediately after the opening of the arcade.

In addition, as another mode, an operation switch (not shown) is provided, and a game clerk or the like operates the operation switch (operation unit) so that it is possible to set whether or not to notify the player of the power-on mode. can be

Next, the game machine of Example 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 64. FIG. The circuit configuration of the fifth embodiment (mainly, the main control board 80, the payout control board 90, and the power supply board 109) is partially different from the circuit configuration of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The circuit configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the parts common to the first embodiment will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, a power supply board 109 for supplying drive power to the main control board 80, payout control board 110, other control boards (sub control board 90, image control board 100) and the like is provided. I have it. In the first embodiment, the memory contents of the backup area provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 and the backup area provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 110 are erased by performing a predetermined input operation on the power supply substrate 109. A RAM clear switch 83 is provided for initialization. In the fifth embodiment, instead of this, a RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 (also referred to as a "specific switch") having both the function of the RAM clear switch 83 of the first embodiment and the function of the mode setting switch 82 of the first embodiment is provided. It is equipped with Therefore, in Example 5, the main control board 80 is not provided with the mode setting switch 82 for changing the game mode setting (setting a predetermined game mode) (see FIG. 59).

The RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 is a push type switch, and its structure is the same as that of the RAM clear switch 83 of the first embodiment. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the RAM clear switch of the first embodiment has both the function of the RAM clear switch and the function of the mode setting switch. As a result, the cost can be reduced, and the common parts (common parts) of the board and its mounting parts are increased as much as possible between the game machine with the game mode setting function and the game machine without the game mode setting function. it becomes possible

Further, the main control board 80 (main control section) and the payout control board 110 (payout control section) of the fifth embodiment have backup areas 161 and 162 in the RAM, respectively, as in the first embodiment. The backup area 161 of the main control board 80 and the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 are backed up by the backup power supply (backup voltage) of the power supply section of the power supply board 109 . In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine stops due to a power failure or power OFF operation, even after the stoppage, for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power), The contents (game state information) of the backup target (memory retention target) stored in these RAMs are saved (memory retention). A means for storing and holding the information (data) to be backed up stored in the backup areas 161 and 162 by this backup power source is called a "storage holding means". In addition, means for storing and holding the backup target information (data) stored in the backup area 161 of the main control board 80 is referred to as "first storage holding means", and the backup target information (data) stored in the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 data) is referred to as "second memory holding means". Further, the stored information (data) to be backed up is provided in the RAM of each of the control boards 80 and 110 as an information save area to be backed up.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the backup area 161 of the main control board 80 includes an initialized area 171 including the first game information storage section, and an uninitialized area 172 including the setting storage section 174 and the base storage section 175. have. Note that the initialized area 171 and/or the uninitialized area 172 may have other areas. In the initialization area 171, an operator such as a game clerk arbitrarily operates the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 in a predetermined manner to erase stored (retained) backup target information (data). and can be initialized. That is, the initialization area 171 is an area that can be initialized at the operator's discretion. By initializing, the player can start the game under the same conditions (holding 0, holding special symbols and normal symbols and no fluctuation display, low probability low base state, etc.) after initialization. It becomes possible.

The non-initialization area 172 is an area in which backup target information (data) cannot be erased even if an operator such as a game clerk operates the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 . That is, the non-initialized area 172 is an area that cannot be initialized at the discretion of the operator. Incidentally, even in the non-initialized area 172, if there is an abnormality in the information (data) stored in the non-initialized area 172, part or all of it shall be initialized. It is an area that cannot be initialized by using a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear/mode setting switch 830). Therefore, when performing initialization using the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830, the initialization target (delete target) can be limited to the information stored in the initialization area.

In addition, as the initialization area 171 of the main control board 80, the first game information storage section 173 is provided. In this first game information storage unit 173, at least, data indicating the game state (probability of determination of special symbols/ordinary symbols (high probability or low probability), base state (high base state or low base state)), special Data indicating the number of design reservations, data indicating the reservation information of special designs (judgment results, variation patterns, etc.), data indicating the number of normal design reservations, data indicating the reservation information of normal designs (judgment results, variation patterns, etc.), special Data indicating the result of judging whether the design/normal design is correct, the remaining period of the high probability state, the remaining period of the high base state, etc., that is, the data according to the control state of the main control unit (special design status flag, normal design status flag, The value of the pending storage counter, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.) are stored. The data stored in this first game information storage unit is called "game information". Further, the data stored in the first game information storage unit 173 is stored (backed up) by memory holding means (first memory holding means) when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, and is stored (backed up) when the power is restored. , the stored data is restored. This data recovery means is called "game information recovery means (first game information recovery means)".

In addition, as the non-initialized area 172 of the main control board 80, a setting storage section 174 and a base storage section 175 are provided. The setting storage unit 174 stores information indicating the set game mode (also referred to as "game mode information" or "setting information"). Information (base values (first base value, second base value) is stored. Data (setting information) stored in the setting storage unit 174 is stored when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected. It is stored (backed up) by the holding means (second storage holding means), and the stored data (setting information) is restored with the restoration of the power supply. The data (base information) stored in the base storage unit 175 is stored by the storage holding means (third storage holding means) when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected. (backed up), and the stored data (base information) is restored when the power supply is restored.This data restoration means is referred to as "game information restoration means (third game information restoration means)."

Further, as described above, the setting information stored in the setting storage unit 174 and the base information stored in the base storage unit 175 are initialized by operating the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 to initialize the RAM of the main control board 80. It is not deleted (initialized) even if it is changed. That is, they are excluded from initialization operations. The setting information stored in the setting storage unit 174 can be changed by performing a predetermined setting change operation, but the base information stored in the base storage unit 175 is , cannot be arbitrarily changed (initialized) by the operator unless an abnormality occurs.

In addition, in the initialization area 176 of the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110, similarly to the initialization area 171 described above, an operator such as a game clerk can arbitrarily set the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 in a predetermined manner. This is an area where the stored (retained) backup target information (data) can be erased and initialized by performing the operation of . That is, the operator arbitrarily operates the RAM clear and mode setting switch 830 in a predetermined manner to initialize both the initialization area 171 of the main control board 80 and the initialization area 176 of the payout control board 110. area is initialized together. As a result, the player can start the game under the same conditions (holding 0, holding special symbols and normal symbols and no fluctuation display, low-probability-low base state, winning ball, etc.) on the gaming machine after initialization. It becomes possible.

In addition, the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 has an initialization area 176 including a second game information storage section 177 . Note that the initialization area 176 may have other areas, and the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 is a non-initialization area for storing information not to be initialized (information about game profits and prize balls). may be provided. The second game information storage unit 177 stores at least data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls (unpaid prize ball information). The data stored in the second game information storage unit is called "game information", "prize ball information", or "game profit information". In addition, the data stored in the second game information storage unit 177 is stored (backed up) by the storage holding means (fourth storage holding means) when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, and is stored (backed up) when the power is restored. , the stored data is restored. This data recovery means is called "game information recovery means (fourth game information recovery means)".

Here, when power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment (power OFF state), when only the power switch 84 is turned ON, the power supply voltage is supplied to the power supply board 109, and the power supply board 109 , supplies necessary drive power to various control boards. Then, the information (data) when the power is turned off (when the power drops) is normally stored (memory retention ) (if there is no abnormality in the backup data), the game can be played after restoring the state (game state) at the time of power OFF (power drop) based on the information (data). state (this is also referred to as "game state recovery means", "game information recovery means", or "game state information recovery means"). On the other hand, when the power switch 84 is turned on, the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 is pressed for a predetermined period while the power switch 84 is turned on (switched from OFF to ON). Input information (RAM clear signal) of the mode setting switch 830 is input to the main control unit 80 and the payout control unit 110, and the initialization regions 171 and 176 (first game If there is information (data) stored in the information storage unit, second game information storage unit), the information (data) stored in the initialization areas 171 and 176 is erased and initialized, and then the game can be played. state (this is also referred to as "game information initialization means"). As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be initialized to the initial state.

Further, by performing initialization (initialization operation) by operating the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 in the above-described predetermined manner, the first game information stored and held by the memory holding means (first memory holding means) The game information of the storage unit 173 (information indicating the result of special symbol propriety determination, etc.), and the game information of the second game information storage unit 177 (unpaid prize ball information) is deleted, and the setting information of the setting storage unit 174 stored and held by the storage holding means (second storage holding means) and the base of the base storage unit 175 stored and held by the storage holding means (third storage holding means) It becomes possible to restore the information and initialize it.

In addition, the method of changing the game mode (change operation method) in the fifth embodiment is substantially the same as in the first embodiment, but in the fifth embodiment, the main control board 80 does not have a mode setting switch, and the power supply Since the game mode is set (setting operation) using the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 on the board 109, the method is partially different. The game mode change method of the fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

First, with the pachinko machine powered off, a setting key (not shown) is inserted into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89, and the setting key is operated (rotated) from the OFF position to the ON position to set the mode. The setting lock portion 89 is turned ON. Next, while the power is off and the setting key is moved to the ON position, the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 is pressed (and held down) while the power switch 84 is turned from OFF to ON. do. That is, the power is turned on with both the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 and the mode setting lock portion 89 turned on. As a result, power is supplied to the gaming machine, the gaming machine is activated, and a "game mode change state" is entered in which the game mode setting can be changed to any setting.

When there is setting information in the setting storage section 174 stored and held by the storage holding means (second storage holding means), the information display section 88 displays a value indicating the game mode corresponding to the setting information. In the "game mode change state", to change the game mode displayed on the information display section 88, that is, the currently set game mode, the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 is pressed. For example, when the currently set game mode is game mode 3, the information display section 88 displays [---3]. When the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 is pressed once in this state, the display mode of the information display section 88 is changed to [---4]. After that, every time the RAM clear and mode setting switch 830 is pressed once, the change is [---5] → [---1] → [---2] → [---3] . . . do. By returning the setting key from the ON position to the OFF position with the information display unit 88 displaying the desired game mode (for example, game mode 4), the game mode is confirmed and set. . As a result, the game mode 4 is set, and the pachinko game machine becomes ready to start the game (interrupt processing such as special symbol suitability determination). Thus, the means for selecting the game mode using the RAM clear and mode setting switch is also called "game mode selection means" or "decision probability selection means". In addition, means for determining and setting the selected game mode is also referred to as "game mode setting means" or "decision probability setting means".

On the other hand, when the power is turned on for the first time (after manufacturing), when the power is turned on for the first time after replacement of the main control board 80, or when there is an abnormality in the setting information in the setting storage unit 174, any setting information is stored. It is considered not to be, and the value indicating the game mode is not displayed. In addition, a value of [----] is displayed on the information display section 88, and unless any game mode is selected by pressing the RAM clear/mode setting switch at least once, the game mode is set. not.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the main control main processing of Example 5 will be described with reference to FIG. Differences from the main control main processing of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 12 will be mainly described, and descriptions of common processing will be omitted. In the main control main processing of the fifth embodiment, after the processing of S108 and S109, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the storage information (base information) of the base storage unit 175 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 described above. Base storage unit determination processing is performed (S111), and the process proceeds to S110. This base storage determination process (S111) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter (after the game is started). The details of the base storage unit determination processing will be described later.

[Mode setting processing]
Next, the mode setting process (S106) of Example 5 will be described with reference to FIG. Differences from the mode setting process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 will be mainly described, and descriptions of common processes will be omitted. In the mode setting process of the fifth embodiment, if it is determined at S3101 that the initialization flag is ON (YES at S3101) and if it is determined at S3102 that the mode setting key is ON (YES at S3102), then Setting information stored in the setting storage unit (setting information stored and held in the storage holding means) is read, and if there is stored setting information, a value indicating a game mode corresponding to the setting information is displayed as information. display in the Here, although not shown in FIG. 61, if the setting information (normal setting information) is not stored in the setting storage unit, or if there is an abnormality in the stored setting information, any setting information is stored. A value (symbol) indicating the state (no game mode selected) is displayed as not stored ([----] described above).

Next, following S3103 and S3104, it is determined whether or not there is an operation (input) of the RAM clear/mode setting switch 830 (S3105). In S3105, when it is determined that there is an input of the RAM clear and mode setting switch 830 (YES in S3105), the setting information indicating the selected game mode is updated and stored (S3106), and the information display section is displayed after the update. The game mode corresponding to the game mode is updated and displayed (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3108. Here, although not shown in FIG. 61, in a state in which no setting information is stored (a state in which [----] is displayed), the mode setting key is switched from ON to OFF to switch the game mode. When the change state ends, the pachinko game machine remains in the game disabled state and does not enter the game start state. That is, in order to change from a state in which no setting information is stored to a game start state (to set any game mode), in the game mode change state, the RAM clear and mode setting switch 830 is pressed at least once. It is necessary to perform an operation (input).

Also, in S3101, if it is determined that the initialization flag is not ON (NO in S3101), then the setting storage unit determination processing described later is performed (S3132), and the game mode corresponding to the setting information in the setting storage unit is set. , the process proceeds to S3118. Also, if it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting key is not ON (NO in S3102), then a setting storage unit determination process, which will be described later, is performed (S3134), and the process proceeds to S3111.

[Setting storage section determination processing]
Next, the setting storage unit determination processing (S3132) of Example 5 will be described with reference to FIG. The setting storage determination process (S3132) is a process executed in the mode setting process (S106) of the fifth embodiment, and is executed when it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is not ON (NO in S3101). be. First, check data related to the setting information stored in the setting storage unit of the main control unit is calculated (S3301), and it is determined whether or not the check data is normal (S3302). That is, in S3302, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the setting information in the setting storage section stored and held by the storage holding means. Means for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in the setting information stored in the setting storage unit (also referred to as "setting probability storage means") when starting the power supply is also referred to as "first abnormality determination means". Further, a means for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the first game information storage section when power supply is started is also referred to as a "second abnormality determination means". Further, a means for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in the game information stored in the second game information storage section when power supply is started is also called a "third abnormality determination means". Further, means for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in the base information stored in the base storage unit when starting power supply is also called "fourth abnormality determination means".

In S3302, the check data is normal, that is, there is no abnormality in the setting information stored in the setting storage unit (setting information stored and held by the storage holding means) (any normal setting information is stored). If so (YES in S3302), the process is terminated and the process proceeds to S3133 of the mode setting process (S106). On the other hand, there is an abnormality in the check data (including the case where no setting information is stored), that is, no information indicating a normal game mode (game modes 1 to 5) is stored, or no setting information If it is determined that it is not stored (NO in S3302), then initialize the storage area (setting information) of the setting storage unit (S3303), turn on the game mode unset flag (S3304), and instruct the game mode setting A notification command is sent (S3305), and an infinite loop is entered. By sending a game mode setting instruction command (sub control unit, etc.), a message such as "Please set the game mode" is displayed on a predetermined display unit (for example, the display screen 7a or the display unit on the back side of the game board). do. As a result, the game clerk or the like operates the RAM clear/mode setting switch or the like, and recognizes that it is necessary to set the game mode by the game mode setting means. Moreover, by making the S3305 after S3305 into an infinite loop, the game cannot be started in the game mode unset state (the game cannot be started). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent unintended game modes from being set and unforeseen disadvantages for players and game parlors. It should be noted that the same processing as the setting storage unit determination processing of S3132 is performed in the setting storage unit determination processing of S3134, so description and illustration thereof are omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the base storage section determination processing (S111) of the fifth embodiment will be described. In the base storage unit determination process (S111), first, check data related to the base value stored in the base storage unit of the main control unit is calculated (S3401), and it is determined whether or not the check data is normal (S3402). That is, in S3402, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the base information in the base storage section stored and held by the storage holding means. In S3402, it is determined that the check data is normal, that is, the base information stored in the base storage unit (base information stored and held by the storage holding means) is normal (normal base information is stored). If so (YES in S3402), the base information stored in the base storage unit (the base information stored and held by the storage holding means), which is the base value at the time of the previous power failure, is displayed on the information display unit (S3403), Finish processing. On the other hand, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the check data (including the case where no base information is stored), that is, no information indicating a normal base value is stored, or no base value is stored. If so (NO in S3402), then initialize the storage area (base information) of the base storage unit (S3403), transmit the base storage unit abnormality notification command (S3405), and set the initial base value (specifically, "0 ”) is displayed (S3406), and the process ends.

By sending a base storage unit abnormality notification command (sub control unit, etc.), a predetermined display unit (for example, the display screen 7a or the display unit on the back side of the game board) displays a message such as "There is an abnormality in the base value, please check." Display a message. As a result, the game clerk or the like sees the opportunity and recognizes that the inspection regarding the base display is necessary. Since the abnormality related to the base display does not directly affect the game, it is possible to start the game. Alternatively, the game may be disabled until the abnormality is resolved.

Next, the power-off monitoring process (S209) of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Differences from the power-off monitoring process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 44 will be mainly described, and descriptions of common processes will be omitted. In the power-off monitoring process (S209) of the fifth embodiment, if it is determined that a power-off signal has been input (YES in S2651), then the data currently stored in the first game information storage unit (state, game information) is stored in the save area of the RAM of the main control unit (S2652), and then the data (state, game information) currently stored in the second game information storage unit is saved to the save area of the RAM of the payout control unit. (S2653), then the data (setting information) stored in the current setting storage section is stored and held in the save area of the RAM of the main control section (S2654), and then stored in the current base storage section The stored data (base information) is stored and retained in the save area of the RAM of the main control unit (S2655), the power flag is turned ON (S2656), and the process is finished. This makes it possible to reliably store and hold the data to be backed up in the backup area in the event of a power failure.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the game information, the setting information, and the base information are stored in different storage areas, and only the game information is subject to arbitrary initialization processing using the RAM clear/mode setting switch. there is Then, even when the game information is initialized, if there is no abnormality in the stored setting information, by setting the game mode to a value based on the setting information, the setting operation of the game mode can be performed again at the time of initialization. This eliminates the need for it, streamlining the settings of the game machine. The same applies when there is an abnormality in the stored game information. In addition, setting information and base information are not subject to arbitrary initialization processing using the RAM clear/mode setting switch, thereby making it possible to provide a fair gaming machine.

[Other aspects]
In the above-described embodiment, the mode setting switch 82 is composed of a sliding DIP switch. The mode setting switch is not limited to such a mode, and may be, for example, a rotary switch or a push-down type or push-up type binary switch. For example, when an arbitrary game mode is set, information indicating the selected game mode (for example, [2]) shall be displayed on the information display section 88 each time the binary switch is operated. It is assumed that the selected game mode changes from [2]→[3]→[4] for each operation.

In addition, in a gaming machine that allows the setting of the game mode to be changed by a game mode change switch such as a binary switch or a rotary switch, the initial value of the game mode in the game mode change state when clearing the RAM is always specified. It may be set (set) to a game mode (for example, game mode 3, which is the value in the middle of five stages). It should be noted that the stored information indicating the game mode is erased by the RAM clear processing. Then, in the game mode change state after clearing the RAM, by operating the game mode change switch in one direction, this specific game mode (game mode 3) is sequentially changed to game mode 2 and game mode 1, and the desired game mode is changed. The game mode shall be selected. In addition, in the game mode change state after clearing the RAM, by operating the game mode change switch in the other direction, this specific game mode (game mode 3) is changed in order to game mode 4 and game mode 5, and desired The game mode shall be selected. As a result, the operation mode for changing the setting after clearing the RAM is common to all game machines (for example, when the setting is set to 1, all game machines are operated twice in one direction). In addition, this makes it possible to reduce operational errors in changing settings when changing the settings of the game modes of a plurality of gaming machines. Also, this specific game mode (initial game mode) may be a game mode in which the jackpot probability is an intermediate value among the game modes provided by the game machine (corresponding to game mode 2 in this embodiment). As a result, a game mode can be set in which the game parlor and the players are well-balanced only by clearing the RAM and shifting to the setting change state. Also, when it is desired to set a plurality of game machines to such a balanced game mode, the setting can be made without operating the game mode change switch. In addition, this makes it possible to minimize the number of operations (operation procedures) involved in changing the settings of the game mode, thereby simplifying the setting operation.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the information display section 88 is provided, and the game information to be displayed is changed depending on the period (the period before entering the playable state, the period during the playable state). Specifically, the information specifying the game mode is displayed during the period before entering the playable state, and the base value is displayed during the period of the playable state. That is, one display unit is used as both the game mode display unit and the base value display unit. Alternatively, a game mode display for displaying the game mode and a base display for displaying the base value may be provided separately. At this time, the information display unit of Example 1 is used as a base display (also referred to as a "game information display unit"), and one or more 7-segment displays are separately provided on the main control board, and the 7-segment display is is used as a game mode indicator (also called a "game information display section"). Even if they are provided separately, the period during which the information specifying the game mode being selected (set) is displayed on the game mode indicator is only the game mode change state before the game starts or the game mode confirmation state. and Further, the base display may be always displayed before the game is ready to be played after the power is turned on, or may be always displayed after the game is ready to be played. At least, it is displayed all the time after it becomes a playable state.

Although the RAM clear switch 83 is provided on the power supply board 109 in the above embodiment, the RAM clear switch may be provided (mounted) on the main control board 80 instead. As a result, it is possible to manage the members (members for establishing specific conditions) related to the change of the game mode on the main control board 80 as much as possible, thereby facilitating the management and strengthening fraud prevention.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, there are five game modes that can be set, and the big win probability, the small win probability, and the winning probability of the big win type are varied according to the game modes. Alternatively, only the low-probability jackpot probability may be varied depending on the game mode. As a result, it becomes possible to easily recognize how much profit can be obtained by setting the game mode, thereby facilitating profit management of the gaming machine.

In addition to the above-described embodiments, the game machine is provided with timer means (for example, a watchdog timer or a timer capable of measuring the time after the power is turned on) capable of measuring the time (or measuring the timing). , when the setting of the game mode is changed, the measured value of the timer means (for example, clock information such as "9:30") is stored in a predetermined storage area, and the stored measured value is confirmed later. It may be possible. In addition, the measurement value indicating the setting change timing (time) stored in this storage area is to be backed up. Also, since this information can be used for fraud prevention and fraud detection, it may be excluded from objects to be erased by RAM clear, like the base value. In other words, even if it is initialized, the stored "measurement value indicating setting change timing (time)" is not erased. Further, the information of the measured value may be output from a predetermined external terminal (external output terminal) to the outside of the gaming machine, and may be managed by a hall computer or the like connected to the external terminal.

Also, in an amusement arcade, a video camera (including a shooting unit, a shooting data recording unit, etc.) that captures images of a game machine, and a display unit (playback display unit) that displays (reproduces) images recorded by the video camera. A gaming machine monitoring system may be constructed with the above. Also, the video camera (monitoring camera) is arranged so as to record the image of the entire gaming machine and its surroundings so that when the game mode setting is changed, the person who changed the setting is recorded. Then, if there is suspicion of illegality in the setting of the game mode, or if there is suspicion of malfunction or error, the stored "measurement value indicating the setting change timing (time)" is read out and a predetermined measurement value is selected. Control may be performed so that the video camera image corresponding to the period (time) can be reproduced.

As another aspect of the embodiment described above, the following aspects can be mentioned. It is desirable to lock the mode setting switch 82 by covering (enclosing) the mode setting switch 82 with a case (covering member) with a lock so that the mode setting switch 82 cannot be freely operated. Only when it is necessary to change the game mode (change the setting), the game mode can be changed by unlocking it with the key and operating the mode setting switch 82 so as to satisfy a predetermined change condition. good. This makes it possible to further reduce the possibility of the game mode being illegally changed. In addition, when the RAM clear switch 83 is operated to initialize the game machine (backup area), a sound of a predetermined volume (high volume) is output from the speaker, or alternatively/in addition to this, By controlling the lighting of the board surface lamp and the frame lamp, the fact that the initialization has been performed shall be conspicuously notified to the surroundings. As a result, the player is notified that the game mode may have been changed. In addition, in Example 1, a mode setting switch 82 is provided on the main control board 80 as shown in FIG. 6 and the like. However, the installation position of the mode setting switch is not limited to such a mode. For example, the mode setting switch 82 may be provided on the payout control board 110 . Also, the mode setting switch 82 may be provided on a board separate from the main control board 80 and capable of communicating with the main control board 80 (capable of transmitting selection information to the CPU of the main control section).

In addition, in the mode setting monitoring process (S210) of the first embodiment, the setting state of the mode setting switch is constantly monitored while power is being supplied (that is, during the game), and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch is When a state different from the game mode set in the pachinko game machine occurs, the state is detected and a predetermined display (display screen 7a or the display on the back side of the game machine), a speaker or the outside of the game machine is displayed. It is supposed to be notified by output. Although the game mode cannot be changed by operating the mode setting switch during the game, when the power is turned on again or the game mode is reset, an unexpected game mode is set, etc. unforeseen circumstances may occur. Therefore, if the mode setting switch is operated even during a game, it is possible to prevent such a situation by announcing an error.

In another aspect, in addition to or instead of this, it is possible to detect whether the mode setting lock is at the ON position or the OFF position during the game, and when the game becomes possible (play start When the mode setting lock is moved from the OFF position to the ON position at the time of ), this is notified by a predetermined display unit to prevent an unexpected situation from occurring. Specifically, when a game is started with the setting key inserted in the insertion part of the mode setting lock (turned to the OFF position), a game clerk or maintenance person touches the back side of the game machine for some reason. Occasionally, the setting key may be erroneously (unintentionally) touched and rotated to the ON position. Even in such a case, since the game is in progress, the setting of the game mode cannot be changed, but problems may occur when the power is turned on again.

For example, the setting key is operated during a game, and the power is turned off while the mode setting lock is at the ON position. Then, when the game clerk turns on the power next time, since the mode setting lock is in the ON position, the game machine enters the game mode confirmation state and does not shift to the game start state. In such a state, by changing the mode setting lock portion to the OFF position, it is possible to shift to the game start state. In addition, although the game mode setting is not changed, when the RAM clear switch is pressed to turn on the power in order to clear the RAM, the mode setting lock is unintentionally turned to the ON position, causing the pachinko machine to stop operating. It shifts to the game mode change state. In such a situation, the pachinko game machine cannot be smoothly shifted to a playable state, and the game clerk or the like is bothered when the power is turned on. In addition, there is a possibility that the setting of the game mode is changed at an unintended timing by an illegal player, resulting in an unforeseen disadvantage.

In order to prevent such a situation, the position (ON or OFF) of the mode setting lock is constantly monitored during the game, and if the mode setting lock is operated to the ON position during the game, a predetermined display is displayed. (the display screen 7a or the display on the back side of the gaming machine), a speaker, or output to the outside of the gaming machine.

[others]
In addition, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, there is a variable variable that can be changed between a "starting opening into which a game ball can enter, and a first mode and a second mode in which the possibility of a game ball entering is higher than that of the first mode." At least one of the type starter and the identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the entry of the game ball into the starter or the variable starter may be provided. In addition, "a variable ball entrance that can change between a state where a game ball can enter and a ball cannot enter a state where a game ball cannot enter, and a first pass/fail judgment based on the ball entering the starting hole a second right/wrong determination means for executing a second right/wrong determination based on the ball entering the variable starter opening; and a special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entrance is put into a ball-enterable state. In addition, "a first game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starter is a predetermined frequency, and a second game state in which the frequency of game balls entering the variable starter is higher than in the first game state. It may be provided with a game state setting means for setting to and. Here, 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency". In addition, "a variable ball entrance that can be changed into a starting opening into which a game ball can enter, a state in which a game ball can enter, and a state in which a game ball cannot enter, Judging means for making a judgment based on the entry of a ball into the starting hole, and game control means for executing game control based on the game information stored in the game information storage means when power supply from the power supply means is started. and" may be provided.

In addition, in Embodiment 1, the number of openings of the first big prize opening or the second big winning opening in one round is one, but the number of openings of the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening in one round is plural. times, or may have different number of open rounds. In addition, in the first embodiment, the second special figure reservation is a control process that preferentially digests the first special figure reservation, a so-called special figure 2 priority control process, but not limited to this, the first special figure reservation It is good also as control processing to digest preferentially to the 2nd special figure reservation, control processing of so-called special figure 1 priority. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special reservation and the digestion of the second special reservation, and among the first special reservation and the second special reservation, the oldest one is digested in order. It may be a control process, that is, a control process of digestion in order of entry (in order of memory).

In addition, in the first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine having a specific area 39, but the present invention is not limited to this. It can also be applied to a type of gaming machine in which it is determined whether or not the high probability state is provided after the end of the jackpot game only by the type of jackpot symbols to be stopped and displayed. Needless to say, this type of gaming machine is also based on "on the basis of a big hit in the special symbol suitability determination (stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol as a big hit symbol)". The pachinko gaming machine of Example 1 also includes other types of gaming machines. In addition, a pachinko machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state) has a specific area inside, and has a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball can enter. A large winning opening is provided that can be changed to a state in which it is impossible to enter a ball, and the big winning opening is placed in a state in which it is possible to enter a ball for a predetermined time when the result of the winning judgment based on the ball entering the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a big winning hole in which a ball is possible and passes through a specific area, it becomes a big win, a big win game is executed, and a predetermined privilege is given to a Pachinko game machine. This pachinko game machine is called a so-called 1-type 2-type mixed machine, and when the result of the winning judgment based on the ball entering the starting hole is a big hit, the big win game is executed without passing through the specific area. Also, as a privilege, generating a high base state that increases the frequency of entry of the game ball into the starting hole can be mentioned. Further, it is possible to have a first starting hole and a second starting hole and generate a high base state that increases the frequency of hitting the second starting hole. The present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines.

(Reference invention 1)
Further, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is:
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
a game state information initialization means for erasing the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply, and not restoring the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , and
The determination probability setting means is
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed,
When the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means may be made unchangeable.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 has selection information determination processing for determining selection information of the determination probability selection means when the power supply means starts power supply in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1. ,
The determination probability setting means is
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, the determination probability corresponding to the selection information determined based on the selection information determination process is used as the determination probability of the determination means. It may be set.

(Reference invention 2)
In addition, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is:
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition;
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
selection information monitoring means for monitoring selection information of the determination probability selection means during a period in which power is supplied by the power supply means;
The information indicating the determination probability stored in the game state information storage means by the selection information monitoring means does not match the selection information of the determination probability selection means even though the change condition is not satisfied. If it is determined as such, a predetermined error process may be executed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1,
When the error processing is executed, the selection information monitoring means determines that the information indicating the determination probability stored in the game state information storage means matches the selection information of the determination probability selection means. The error processing may be terminated based on.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2,
The change condition may be established at least when the power supply means starts supplying power.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 2-1 to 2-3,
storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
a game state information initialization means for erasing the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power, and for not restoring the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , and
The change condition may be established at least when the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means.

(Reference Invention 3)
Further, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3 is:
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power; with
selection information determination processing for determining selection information of the determination probability selection means when the power supply means starts power supply;
When the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started, the information indicating the determination probability specified based on the restored game state information and the selection information of the determination probability selection means are combined. If it is determined that they do not match, predetermined error processing may be executed.

Thus, when the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the determination probability is to be changed, a predetermined error process is performed. In addition, this makes it possible to notify the occurrence of an action that attempts to change the determination probability, or to prevent it, while restoring the game state information.

Further, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2, in the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1, when the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started, based on the restored game state information, When it is determined that the information indicating the specified determination probability matches the selection information of the determination probability selection means, the game may be executed without executing the error processing.

According to such a gaming machine, when the game state information is restored and the game is started, the determination probability specified based on the restored game state information and the determination probability corresponding to the selection information of the determination probability selection means and , and if it is determined that they match, the game can be executed in a normal state without performing error processing. As a result, the game is started after the selection information of the determination probability selection means is confirmed when the game is started. Also, this makes it possible to provide a fair game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or Reference Invention 3-2,
The error processing may include game control stop processing for stopping at least part of game control. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed while the determination probability corresponding to the selection information of the determination probability selection means does not match the determination probability specified based on the restored game state information. .

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3,
The error processing includes notification processing for notifying that the information indicating the determination probability specified based on the restored game state information does not match the selection information of the determination probability selection means.

(Reference invention 4)
In the case of a game machine equipped with a probability setting function as described above, since the game shop decides which setting to use, the player expects the game machine with a high setting (setting with a high jackpot probability) to play the game. select a machine. Also, in order to attract many players, the pachinko parlor installs a lot of high-setting game machines that easily give a lot of profits to the players, or gives a lot of profits to the players in order to get a lot of profits. A large number of game machines with low settings (settings with low probability of big hits) are installed, and an appropriate number of game machines with high settings are installed to balance them. Therefore, the setting of the jackpot probability and its management are very important.

On the other hand, when the amount of profit given to the player is far from the expected amount, the setting of the gaming machine may be checked. Also, if the cause is that the setting of the game machine is not intended, it may be simply that the probability setter on the side of the game store has set it by mistake (to a probability different from the plan), or , it is necessary to check whether the cheater set the probability incorrectly. However, since it is not known when the setting of the jackpot probability was changed, it takes a great deal of effort to check security cameras and the like. Moreover, if such fraudulent acts are committed, both the gaming parlor and the players will be disadvantaged, and there is a risk that the number of players will decrease and the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease.

The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and in a game machine equipped with a judgment probability setting function, it is possible to store the timing of changing the judgment probability setting to prevent fraud and realize a fair gaming machine. It provides.

The game machine of Reference invention 4-1 invention is
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
timer means for counting at a constant period (timekeeping means for timekeeping);
timer storage means for storing the count value of the timer means,
By performing a predetermined input operation with the start of power supply by the power supply means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed,
The timer storage means stores a count value when the determination probability of the determination means is changed.

According to such a game machine, there are determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probabilities of the determination means, and determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation. and determination probability setting means capable of setting the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. Further, it comprises a timer means (clocking means) for counting at a constant period and a timer storage means for storing a predetermined count value of the timer means, the timer storage means being the timer means when the setting of the determination probability is changed. shall store the count value of As a result, when the setting of the determination probability is changed, the count value at that time is stored, and it becomes possible to check later when the setting of the determination probability was changed. Also, this makes it possible to confirm whether the change timing of the determination probability is appropriate, whether the changer is appropriate, and the like.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1,
The game machine is characterized by comprising an external output terminal capable of outputting the count value stored in the timer storage means to the outside of the gaming machine.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to output the count value indicating the time when the determination probability stored in the timer storage means is changed to the outside of the game machine. As a result, it is possible to easily manage the setting change timing of the determination probability of each gaming machine using a hall computer or the like connected to the gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or Reference Invention 4-2,
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
a game state information initialization means for erasing the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply, and not restoring the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , and
The determination probability setting means is
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed,
When the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means cannot be changed.

According to such a game machine, the game state information including the information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") is stored and retained even after the power supply is stopped. We are prepared. Then, when the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is erased, and the game is started without restoring the game state information. It is possible to change the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means and the game is started, the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means cannot be changed.

As a result, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it becomes necessary to initialize the game state. It is possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

In addition, the game machine monitoring system of Reference Invention 4-4 is
a gaming machine according to any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3;
a recording device having a photographing unit for photographing the gaming machine and a storage unit for storing the image photographed by the photographing unit;
It is characterized by comprising

According to such a gaming machine monitoring system, the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, a photographing section for photographing the gaming machine, and a storage section for storing images photographed by the photographing section are provided. and a recording device. As a result, it is possible to easily confirm when the determination probability of the game machine is changed, who changed the setting, etc., by viewing the image of the recording device at the time corresponding to the count value stored in the timer storage means. becomes.

(Reference Invention 5)
In the case of a game machine equipped with a probability setting function as described above, since the game shop decides which setting to use, the player expects a game machine with a high setting (setting with a high jackpot probability). select a machine. Also, in order to attract many players, the pachinko parlor installs many high-setting game machines that easily give a large amount of profits to the players, or gives a large amount of profits to the players in order to obtain a large profit. A lot of game machines with low setting (setting with low probability of big win) are installed, and an appropriate number of game machines with high setting are installed in order to balance them. Therefore, the setting of the jackpot probability and its management are very important. Therefore, when setting the jackpot probability, it is preferable to provide a display section for displaying information indicating the set jackpot probability for a predetermined period in order to grasp which jackpot probability is set.

In addition, since the percentage of the game profit given based on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls is very important and useful game information in providing a fair gaming machine, the display unit that displays the information indicating the given ratio is provided. It is preferable to provide However, providing a large number of display units, such as a display unit that displays information indicating the probability of a big win or a display unit that displays information indicating the percentage of game profits to be given, is difficult due to the installation space of game components. It is difficult and cost can be an issue.

The present reference invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a fair gaming machine by efficiently displaying a large amount of game information by controlling the display timing.

The game machine of the Reference invention 5-1 invention is
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a game profit giving means for giving a predetermined amount of game profit based on the establishment of a specific condition;
a game information display unit capable of displaying predetermined game information;
with
The game information display unit displays information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means during the first period, and displays information indicating the allocation rate of the game profit in the specific period during the second period. It is something to do.

According to such a game machine, there are determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probabilities of the determination means, and determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation. and determination probability setting means capable of setting the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. In addition, it comprises a game profit giving means for giving a game profit when a specific condition is established (for example, a ball entering the ball entrance or a specific pattern is stopped and displayed), and a game information display section for displaying predetermined game information. The game information display section displays information indicating the set determination probability during the first period, and displays information indicating the percentage of the game profit given in the specific period during the second period. As a result, the game information (set probability information or game profit giving ratio information) displayed on the game information display unit is made different depending on the period (first period or second period), and the display unit can be shared. It is possible to appropriately grasp the game information.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1,
The first period is a period before starting the game, and the second period is a period after starting the game.

According to such a gaming machine, the first period during which the information indicating the set determination probability is displayed is the period before the start of the game, and the second period during which the information indicating the allocation rate of the game profit is displayed is the period after the start of the game. period. That is, the determination probability set by a predetermined input operation before the start of the game is displayed before the game is started, and after the game is started by shooting a game ball, etc., the setting information of the determination probability is not set. , to display the percentage of game profit to be given at the start of the game. As a result, appropriate information can be displayed at appropriate times, the display unit can be shared, and game information can be grasped reliably.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2,
A ball entrance into which game balls can enter,
a first counting means capable of counting the number of game balls shot into the game area;
a second counting means capable of counting the number of game balls given by the game profit giving means;
The specific condition is established based on the game ball entering the ball entrance,
The information indicating the allocation rate of the game profit displayed on the game information display section after the start of the game is information calculated based on the count values of the first counting means and the second counting means. It is something to do.

According to such a gaming machine, there are a ball entrance that satisfies a specific condition, a first counting means capable of counting the number of shot balls to the game area, and a second counting means capable of counting the number of given game balls. And prepare. The information indicating the percentage of game profit to be given is information calculated based on the count values of the first counting means and the second coefficient means. As a result, the percentage of game profit to be awarded displayed in the second period after the start of the game is calculated based on the number of shot balls and the number of game balls awarded. It is assumed that there is no (no change) game information. Further, in the first period before the start of the game, even if the information indicating the allocation ratio of the game profit is not displayed and the information indicating the determination probability is displayed, no trouble is caused and the game information is surely grasped. making it possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-3,
The game information display section displays information indicating the determination probability in the first period when the determination probability setting means changes and sets the determination probability of the determination means. be.

According to such a gaming machine, when the determination probability of the determining means is changed and set, information indicating the determination probability is displayed in the first period. Thus, when a predetermined input operation is performed to change the setting of the determination probability, the information indicating the determination probability is reliably displayed in the first period, so that the game information can be grasped appropriately and reliably. It becomes possible. The game information display section may not display the information indicating the determination probability in the first period when the setting of the determination probability is not changed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-4,
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
a game state information initialization means for erasing the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power, and for not restoring the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; ,
with
The determination probability setting means is
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed,
When the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means cannot be changed.

According to such a game machine, the game state information including the information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") is stored and retained even after the power supply is stopped. We are prepared. Then, when the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is erased, and the game is started without restoring the game state information. It is possible to change the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means and the game is started, the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means cannot be changed.

As a result, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it becomes necessary to initialize the game state. It is possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

(Reference Invention 6)
In the case of a game machine equipped with a probability setting function as described above, since the game shop decides which setting to use, the player expects the game machine with a high setting (setting with a high jackpot probability) to play the game. select a machine. In addition, the pachinko parlor side installs many machines with high settings in order to attract many players, installs many machines with low settings in order to obtain more profits, and installs many machines with low settings to achieve a balance. Install an appropriate number of high-setting game machines. However, since this is all determined by the gaming arcade, not even a single high-setting gaming machine is installed (all are low-setting), and there is a risk that the player side will be significantly disadvantaged compared to the gaming arcade side. In addition, as a result, the players become more distrustful of the game parlors, which may lead to a decrease in the number of players and a decrease in the operating rate of the game machines.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and a game machine equipped with a determination probability setting function has a function of randomly setting the determination probability, thereby diversifying the setting mode of the determination probability. To provide a game machine with high game interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
a determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
A gaming machine in which the determination means makes a determination based on the determination probability stored in the game state information storage means,
The determination probability selection means includes random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities.

According to such a gaming machine, a plurality of determination probabilities are stored as the determination probabilities of the determination means; a determination probability selection unit capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation; A determination probability setting means capable of setting a selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means, and a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including information indicating the set determination probability. Further, as the determination probability selection means, a random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities is provided. Accordingly, when the determination probability is selected (set) by the random selection means, the determination probability is randomly selected from a plurality of determination probabilities, and the determination probability is set. In addition, this makes it possible for a probability setter to set a well-balanced determination probability without intentionally setting a specific determination probability.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1,
The apparatus is characterized in that the determination probability selection means includes specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities.

According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the random selection means, the determination probability selection means is provided with the specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities. Thereby, when the determination probability is selected (set) by the specific probability setting means, a specific determination probability (for example, an intermediate determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities) is selected from a plurality of determination probabilities, and The determination probability is set. Further, this makes it possible to prevent the game machine from being set with a set value not intended by the probability setter.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2,
It is characterized in that it is possible to select whether the determination probability is selected by the random selection means or the determination probability is selected by the specific probability selection means depending on the mode of input operation of the determination probability selection means.

According to such a gaming machine, the probability setter randomly sets the determination probability or sets the determination probability according to the input operation mode (first input operation mode, second input operation mode, etc.) of the determination probability selection means. It is possible to select whether to set it to probability. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of the determination probability in the game parlor.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-2 or Reference Invention 6-3,
The apparatus is characterized by comprising an informing unit for informing which of the random selection means and the specific probability selection means has selected the determination probability.

According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that it is provided with an informing section for informing whether the judgment probability is judged by the random selection means or the specific probability selection means. Accordingly, by confirming the notification mode of the notification unit, it is possible to confirm which determination probability selection means selected (set) the selection (setting) of the determination probability.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4,
The reporting unit is characterized by reporting in a manner recognizable by the player.

According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize the notification mode of the notification unit. As a result, the player can recognize which determination probability selection means selects (sets) the selection (setting) of the determination probability, and determines which gaming machine is used to play the game. It can be used as a reference. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent the game from being played on a game machine with unintended settings as much as possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-4 or Reference Invention 6-5,
The reporting unit is characterized by reporting in a manner recognizable by a game clerk.

According to such a gaming machine, the game clerk (probability setter) can recognize the notification mode of the notification unit. As a result, the game clerk (probability setter) can recognize which judgment probability selection means has selected (set) the selection (setting) of the judgment probability. In addition, this makes it possible to check whether or not the determination probability is selected (set) by an unintended determination probability selection means, and to prevent the determination probability from being selected (set) by an unintended determination probability selection means as much as possible. can be prevented.

(Reference Invention 7)
The gaming machine of the Reference Invention 7-1 invention is
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
a game state information initialization means for erasing the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power, and for not restoring the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , and
A gaming machine in which the determination means makes a determination based on the determination probability stored in the game state information storage means,
The determination probability selection means includes random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities,
The determination probability setting means is
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed,
When the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means cannot be changed.

According to such a gaming machine, a plurality of determination probabilities are stored as the determination probabilities of the determination means; a determination probability selection unit capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation; A determination probability setting means capable of setting a selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means, and a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including information indicating the set determination probability. Further, as the determination probability selection means, a random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities is provided. Accordingly, when the determination probability is selected (set) by the random selection means, the determination probability is randomly selected from a plurality of determination probabilities, and the determination probability is set. In addition, this makes it possible for a probability setter to set a well-balanced determination probability without intentionally setting a specific determination probability.

Further, a memory holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information even after the power supply is stopped is provided, and when the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is erased and the game state information is stored. It is possible to change to the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means (setting change by the determination probability setting means) on the condition that the game is started without restoring the. That is, when the game state information is restored based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means and the game is started, the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means cannot be changed. As a result, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the game state. It is possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1,
The apparatus is characterized in that the determination probability selection means includes specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities.

According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the random selection means, the determination probability selection means is provided with the specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities. Thereby, when the determination probability is selected (set) by the specific probability setting means, a specific determination probability (for example, an intermediate determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities) is selected from a plurality of determination probabilities, and The determination probability is set. Further, this makes it possible to prevent the game machine from being set with a set value not intended by the probability setter.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2,
It is characterized in that it is possible to select whether the determination probability is selected by the random selection means or the determination probability is selected by the specific probability selection means depending on the input operation mode of the determination probability selection means.

According to such a gaming machine, the probability setter randomly sets the determination probability or sets the determination probability according to the input operation mode (first input operation mode, second input operation mode, etc.) of the determination probability selection means. It is possible to select whether to set it to probability. As a result, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of the determination probability in the game parlor.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 or Reference Invention 7-3,
The apparatus is characterized by comprising a notification unit for notifying which of the random selection means and the specific probability selection means has selected the determination probability.

According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that it is provided with an informing section for informing whether the judgment probability is judged by the random selection means or the specific probability selection means. Accordingly, by confirming the notification mode of the notification unit, it is possible to confirm which determination probability selection means selected (set) the selection (setting) of the determination probability.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4,
The reporting unit is characterized by reporting in a manner recognizable by the player.

According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize the notification mode of the notification unit. As a result, the player can recognize which determination probability selection means selects (sets) the selection (setting) of the determination probability, and determines which gaming machine is used to play the game. It can be used as a reference. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent the game from being played on a game machine with unintended settings as much as possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 or Reference Invention 7-5,
The reporting unit is characterized by reporting in a manner recognizable by a game clerk.

According to such a gaming machine, the game clerk (probability setter) can recognize the notification mode of the notification unit. As a result, the game clerk (probability setter) can recognize which judgment probability selection means has selected (set) the selection (setting) of the judgment probability. In addition, this makes it possible to check whether or not the determination probability is selected (set) by an unintended determination probability selection means, and to prevent the determination probability from being selected (set) by an unintended determination probability selection means as much as possible. can be prevented.

(Reference Invention 8)
In addition, the conventional game machine has a function of retaining the game state when the power supply is interrupted and restoring the game state based on the retained memory when the power supply is resumed, a so-called backup function. There was one that had When a game machine having a backup function as described above is equipped with a probability setting function, it becomes possible to change the setting while maintaining the game state, and depending on how these functions are used, it is possible to easily generate a big win. , there is a risk that fraud will occur, or that it will not be possible to provide fair gaming machines.

In addition, in the case of a game machine equipped with a probability setting function, since the game store decides which setting to use, the player expects the game machine with high setting (setting with high probability of big win). select. In addition, the pachinko parlor side installs many machines with high settings in order to attract many players, installs many machines with low settings in order to obtain more profits, and installs many machines with low settings to achieve a balance. Install an appropriate number of high-setting game machines. However, since this is all determined by the gaming arcade, not even a single high-setting gaming machine is installed (all are low-setting), and there is a risk that the player side will be significantly disadvantaged compared to the gaming arcade side. In addition, as a result, the players become more distrustful of the game parlors, which may lead to a decrease in the number of players and a decrease in the operating rate of the game machines.

The present reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances. A fair gaming machine is provided by having a function of notifying when the setting is changed.

The game machine of Reference invention 8-1 invention is
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
a game state information initialization means for erasing the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply, and not restoring the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , and
The determination probability setting means is
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed,
When the game state information is restored by the game state information restoration means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means cannot be changed,
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means,
A notification mode of a predetermined notification section (liquid crystal, rear lamp) is made different between when the determination probability of the determination means is changed by performing a predetermined input operation and when the determination probability of the determination means is not changed. It is characterized by

According to such a game machine, by performing a predetermined input operation, it is possible to select and set the determination probability of the determination means to a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities. Further, a memory holding means capable of storing and holding game state information including information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") even after the power supply is stopped is provided. Then, when the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is erased, and the game is started without restoring the game state information. It is possible to change the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means and the game is started, the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means cannot be changed. Further, even when the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is erased and the game is started without restoring the game state information, there are times when the determination probability is changed and times when the determination probability is not changed. The notification mode of the notification unit is made different between when the determination probability is changed and when it is not changed.

As a result, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the game state. It is possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. In addition, it is made possible to confirm whether or not the determination probability has been changed by the notification mode of the notification unit. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1,
The notification section is characterized in that it notifies whether or not the determination probability of the determination means has been changed or not in a notification mode recognizable by the player.

According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed according to the notification mode of the notification unit. As a result, the player can recognize whether or not the selection (setting) of the determination probability has been changed, and can refer to which gaming machine to play the game with when selecting the gaming machine. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent the game from being played on a game machine with unintended settings as much as possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 or Reference Invention 8-2,
The notification means is characterized in that it notifies whether or not the determination probability of the determination means is changed or not in a notification manner recognizable by the game clerk.

According to such a gaming machine, the game clerk (probability setter) can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed according to the reporting mode of the reporting unit. As a result, the game clerk (probability setter) can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed with the initialization of the game state information. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent situations such as unintentionally changing the determination probability or unintentionally not changing the determination probability as much as possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-2 or Reference Invention 8-3,
identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means, and stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner when the result of the determination is a specific result;
The notification unit is characterized by continuing the notification mode at least during a period from a predetermined time after the start of power supply by the power supply unit until execution of the variable display of the identification information.

According to such a game machine, the identification information display means for displaying the identification information in a variable manner is provided, and the notification mode in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the determination probability by the notification unit has been changed is from a predetermined time after the start of power supply, The period until the variable display of the identification information is executed, that is, the period from when the gaming machine is turned on until the game is started is assumed to be continued. As a result, it is possible to check whether or not the setting of the determination probability has been changed before starting the game. In addition, this makes it possible to refer to which game machine to use when selecting a game machine.

(Reference Invention 9)
The game machine of Reference invention 9-1 invention is
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
a game state information initialization means for erasing the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power, and for not restoring the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , and
The determination probability setting means is
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed,
When the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means cannot be changed,
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, and when the determination probability of the determination means is changed by performing a predetermined input operation;
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means and the determination probability of the determination means is not changed;
when the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started;
, the notification mode of a predetermined notification unit (liquid crystal, rear lamp) is made different.

According to such a game machine, by performing a predetermined input operation, it is possible to select and set the determination probability of the determination means to a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities. Further, a memory holding means capable of storing and holding game state information including information indicating the judgment probability set by the judgment probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") even after the power supply is stopped is provided. Then, when the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is erased, and the game is started without restoring the game state information. It is possible to change the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means and the game is started, the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means cannot be changed.

In addition, the notification mode of the notification unit is made different between when the game state information is restored and the game is started and when the game is started without the game state information restored. Furthermore, even when the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is erased and the game is started without restoring the game state information, there are times when the determination probability is changed and times when the determination probability is not changed. The notification mode of the notification unit is made different between when the determination probability is changed and when it is not changed.

As a result, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the game state. It is possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. In addition, whether or not the determination probability has been changed and whether or not the game state information has been restored can be confirmed by the notification mode of the notification unit. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1,
The notification unit notifies whether the determination probability of the determination means has been changed, whether the determination probability of the determination means has not been changed, or whether the game state information has been restored, in a notification mode recognizable by the player. It is characterized.

According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed and whether or not the game state information has been restored, depending on the notification mode of the notification unit. As a result, the player can recognize whether the selection (setting) of the determination probability has been changed and whether the game state information has been restored. It can be used as a reference. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent the game from being played on a game machine with unintended settings as much as possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 or Reference Invention 9-2,
The notification means notifies whether the determination probability of the determination means has been changed, whether the determination probability of the determination means has not been changed, or whether the game state information has been restored in a notification mode recognizable by the game clerk. It is characterized.

According to such a gaming machine, a game clerk (probability setter) can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed and whether or not the game state information has been restored according to the notification mode of the notification unit. As a result, the game clerk (probability setter) can recognize whether or not the game state information has been restored, and whether or not the determination probability has been changed along with the initialization of the game state information. In addition, this makes it possible to prevent situations such as unintentionally changing the determination probability or unintentionally not changing the determination probability as much as possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-2 or Reference Invention 9-3,
identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the determination result of the determination means, and stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner when the result of the determination is a specific result;
The notification unit is characterized by continuing the notification mode at least during a period from a predetermined time after the start of power supply by the power supply unit until execution of the variable display of the identification information.

According to such a gaming machine, the identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information is provided. The period from the start of the power supply to the execution of the variable display of the identification information, that is, the period from the power-on of the game machine to the start of the game. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not the setting of the determination probability has been changed and whether or not the game state information has been restored before starting the game. In addition, this makes it possible to refer to which game machine to use when selecting a game machine.

(Reference invention 10)
Also, when the amount of profit given to the player is far from the expected amount, the setting of the gaming machine may be checked. Also, if the cause is that the setting of the game machine is not intended, it may be simply that the probability setter on the side of the game store has set it by mistake (to a probability different from the plan), or , it is necessary to check whether the cheater set the probability incorrectly. However, since it is not known when the setting of the jackpot probability was changed, it takes a lot of effort to check security cameras and the like. In addition, if such fraudulent acts are committed, both the game parlor and the players will be disadvantaged, and there is a risk that the number of players will decrease and the operating rate of the gaming machine will decrease. In addition, there is a game machine equipped with a movable object that operates to indicate the feasibility of a jackpot game or that operates in accordance with the variation display of symbols, and the movable object is reliably positioned at a specific position of the game machine. For this reason, some game machines are initialized when the power is turned on. The present reference invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a fair gaming machine by clarifying the setting change of the judgment probability in a gaming machine equipped with a judgment probability setting function.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 is
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
special game execution means for performing a special game advantageous to the player by stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
a first movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode;
and a first movable control means for controlling the operation of the first movable part,
The first movable control means initially operates the first movable portion when the power supply means starts supplying power,
when a predetermined determination probability is set by the determination probability setting means, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability has been set is executed;
After the power supply means starts power supply, the setting notification is performed, and then the initial operation of the first movable portion is performed.

According to such a game machine, there are determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probabilities of the determination means, and determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation. and determination probability setting means capable of setting the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. It has a first movable part that initially operates in a predetermined operation mode with the start of power supply, and when a predetermined determination probability is set, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability has been set is executed. shall be Then, after the power supply is started, the setting notification is performed, and then the initial operation of the first movable portion is performed.

This makes it possible to execute the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable portion in the order of the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable portion, which are executed along with the start of power supply. In addition, this prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that the setting has been changed from being hindered by the initial operation of the first movable part, thereby ensuring the visibility of the setting notification and confirming that the setting has been changed. can be reliably notified.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1,
An effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect in accordance with the variable display of the identification information,
The setting notification is displayed on the effect display unit and executed,
The initial motion of the first movable portion is characterized in that the motion passes through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display portion.

According to such a game machine, the effect display section capable of displaying a predetermined game effect is provided. It is set as an operation mode to pass through. This prevents the setting information displayed on the performance display part from being obstructed by the initial operation of the first movable part, ensures the visibility of the setting information, and reliably informs that the setting has been changed. becomes possible. Note that the "initial operation of the first movable part" is determined whether there are operational defects in the first movable part (whether there is a failure in the movable part) or whether the first movable part is positioned at the initial position (origin position). This is an operation for (moving to the initial position if it is in a place other than the initial position), and is an operation process executed when the power is turned on. It is also called origin return operation.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-2,
a second movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode;
a second movable control means for controlling the operation of the second movable part;
The second movable control means initially operates the second movable portion in response to the start of power supply by the power supply means,
The initial motion of the second movable portion is set to a mode of motion that does not pass through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display portion,
After the power supply means starts supplying power, an initial operation of the second movable portion is performed, and then an initial operation of the first movable portion is performed.

According to such a game machine, in addition to the first movable portion, the second movable portion is provided that initially operates in a predetermined operation mode when power supply is started. 1 moving part, the operation mode is such that it does not pass through the position overlapping the front surface of the effect display part. After the power supply is started, the initial operation of the second movable portion is performed, and then the initial operation of the first movable portion is performed. As a result, the initial operation of the second movable portion that does not impede the visibility of the effect display portion that displays the setting notification is preceded by the initial operation of the first movable portion that may impede the visibility of the effect display portion that displays the setting notification. It allows you to run In addition, this makes it possible to rapidly advance the initial operation of the movable portion and quickly bring the gaming machine into a playable state after the power is turned on.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-3,
The setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable portion are executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable portion is executed.

According to such a game machine, the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable portion can be executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable portion is executed. As a result, the initial operation of the second movable part that does not impede the visibility of the effect display section that displays the setting notification is performed first in parallel with the setting notification, and the setting notification is displayed after performing the setting notification for a predetermined period. It is possible to execute the initial operation of the first movable portion that may hinder the visibility of the effect display portion. As a result, the initial operation of the first movable part and the second movable part can be quickly completed without impairing the visibility of the setting notification, and the gaming machine can be quickly put into a playable state after the power is turned on. Become.

Note that the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable portion are started in parallel, and the initial operation of the second movable portion ends even after the setting notification is performed for a predetermined period (a period sufficient for notification of the setting change). If not, the initial operation of the first movable portion may be executed in parallel with the continuing initial operation of the second movable portion, or may be executed after the initial operation of the second movable portion is completed. may Further, in the case where the setting notification is continued after a predetermined period of time (a period sufficient for notification of the setting change) has elapsed, the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable portion are executed in parallel after the predetermined period has elapsed. may That is, it is sufficient that a predetermined period (a period sufficient for setting change notification) is set as the execution period of the setting notification during which the initial operation of the first movable portion is not performed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 10-1 to 10-4,
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
a game state information initialization means for erasing the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply, and not restoring the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , and
The determination probability setting means is
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed,
When the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means cannot be changed.

According to such a game machine, the game state information including the information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") is stored and retained even after the power supply is stopped. We are prepared. Then, when the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is erased, and the game is started without restoring the game state information. It is possible to change the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means and the game is started, the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means cannot be changed.

As a result, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the game state. It is possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

(Reference Invention 11)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 is
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
special game execution means for performing a special game advantageous to the player by stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
a first movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode;
and a first movable control means for controlling the operation of the first movable part,
The first movable control means initially operates the first movable portion when the power supply means starts supplying power,
When a predetermined determination probability is set by the determination probability setting means, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability has been set is executed,
setting notification confirmation means for determining whether or not the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time;
The first movable control means executes the initial operation of the first movable portion after determining that the setting notification confirmation means has executed the setting notification for a predetermined time after the power supply means starts supplying power. It is characterized by

According to such a game machine, there are determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probabilities of the determination means, and determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation. and determination probability setting means capable of setting the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. It has a first movable part that initially operates in a predetermined operation mode with the start of power supply, and when a predetermined determination probability is set, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability has been set is executed. shall be A setting notification confirming means for confirming that the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time is provided, and after determining that the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time after the power supply is started, the initial operation of the first movable part is performed.

Further, a first signal transmitting means for transmitting a first signal indicating that the setting notification has been performed after the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time, and after the power supply is started and the first signal is received, the first movable The initial operation of the unit may be executed.

This makes it possible to execute the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable portion in the order of the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable portion, which are executed along with the start of power supply. In addition, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the first movable portion after securing the set notification time of the predetermined time. In addition, this prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that the setting has been changed from being hindered by the initial operation of the first movable part, and reliably ensures the visibility of the setting notification for a predetermined period of time, It is possible to reliably notify that the setting has been changed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1,
An effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect in accordance with the variable display of the identification information,
The setting notification is displayed on the effect display unit and executed,
The initial motion of the first movable portion is characterized in that the motion passes through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display portion.

According to such a game machine, the effect display section capable of displaying a predetermined game effect is provided. It is set as an operation mode to pass through. This prevents the setting information displayed on the performance display part from being obstructed by the initial operation of the first movable part, ensures the visibility of the setting information, and reliably informs that the setting has been changed. becomes possible. Note that the "initial operation of the first movable part" is determined whether there are operational defects in the first movable part (whether there is a failure in the movable part) or whether the first movable part is positioned at the initial position (origin position). This is an operation for (moving to the initial position if it is in a place other than the initial position), and is an operation process executed when the power is turned on. It is also called origin return operation.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-2,
a second movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode;
a second movable control means for controlling the operation of the second movable part;
The second movable control means initially operates the second movable portion in response to the start of power supply by the power supply means,
The initial motion of the second movable portion is set to a mode of motion that does not pass through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display portion,
After the power supply means starts supplying power, an initial operation of the second movable portion is performed, and then an initial operation of the first movable portion is performed.

According to such a game machine, in addition to the first movable portion, the second movable portion is provided that initially operates in a predetermined operation mode when power supply is started. 1 moving part, the operation mode is such that it does not pass through the position overlapping the front surface of the effect display part. After the power supply is started, the initial operation of the second movable portion is performed, and then the initial operation of the first movable portion is performed. As a result, the initial operation of the second movable portion that does not impede the visibility of the effect display portion that displays the setting notification is preceded by the initial operation of the first movable portion that may impede the visibility of the effect display portion that displays the setting notification. It allows you to run In addition, this makes it possible to rapidly advance the initial operation of the movable portion and quickly bring the gaming machine into a playable state after the power is turned on.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3,
The setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable portion are executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable portion is executed.

According to such a game machine, the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable portion can be executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable portion is executed. As a result, the initial operation of the second movable part that does not impede the visibility of the effect display section that displays the setting notification is performed first in parallel with the setting notification, and the setting notification is displayed after performing the setting notification for a predetermined period. It is possible to execute the initial operation of the first movable portion that may hinder the visibility of the effect display portion. As a result, the initial operation of the first movable part and the second movable part can be quickly completed without impairing the visibility of the setting notification, and the gaming machine can be quickly put into a playable state after the power is turned on. Become.

Note that the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable portion are started in parallel, and the initial operation of the second movable portion ends even after the setting notification is performed for a predetermined period (a period sufficient for notification of the setting change). If not, the initial operation of the first movable portion may be executed in parallel with the continuing initial operation of the second movable portion, or may be executed after the initial operation of the second movable portion is completed. may Further, in the case where the setting notification is continued after a predetermined period of time (a period sufficient for notification of the setting change) has elapsed, the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable portion are executed in parallel after the predetermined period has elapsed. may That is, it is sufficient that a predetermined period (a period sufficient for setting change notification) is set as the execution period of the setting notification during which the initial operation of the first movable portion is not performed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4,
An initial operation confirmation means for determining whether the initial operation of the second movable part has ended,
After determining that the setting notification confirming means has executed the setting notification for a predetermined time and after determining that the initial operation confirming means has completed the initial operation, the first movable portion is characterized by executing the initial operation of

According to such a game machine, it is provided with an initial motion confirming means for determining whether or not the initial motion of the second movable portion has ended. Then, after the setting notification is performed for a predetermined time and after the initial operation is completed, the initial operation of the first movable portion is performed. This makes it possible to perform the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable portion, which are executed with the start of power supply, before the initial operation of the first movable portion. Further, since the setting notification time of the predetermined time is ensured and the initial operation of the first movable portion is started after the operation of the second movable portion is completed, the visibility of the setting notification indicating that the setting has been changed is improved. , it is possible to prevent obstruction by the initial operation of the first movable portion, and to reliably notify that the setting has been changed.

Further, it comprises second signal transmission means for transmitting a second signal indicating that the initial operation of the second movable portion is completed after the initial operation of the second movable portion is completed. Then, after receiving both the first signal transmitted after executing the setting notification for a predetermined time and the second signal transmitted after completing the initial operation of the second movable portion, the initial operation of the first movable portion is performed. may be executed.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Inventions 11-1 to 11-5,
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
a game state information initialization means for erasing the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power, and for not restoring the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; , and
The determination probability setting means is
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed,
When the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means cannot be changed.

According to such a game machine, the game state information including the information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as "setting information") is stored and retained even after the power supply is stopped. We are prepared. Then, when the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is erased, and the game is started without restoring the game state information. It is possible to change the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means and the game is started, the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means cannot be changed.

As a result, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the game state. It is possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

(Reference Invention 12)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 is
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
special game execution means for performing a special game advantageous to the player by stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
game information storage means for storing game information including the result of determination by the determination means;
setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a first storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a second storage holding means capable of storing and holding the setting information stored in the setting probability storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
game information recovery means capable of recovering game information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply;
A game in which the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means is erased when the power supply means starts supplying power by a predetermined input operation, and the game information when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected is not restored. and information initialization means,
making it possible to change the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means when the game information initialized by the game information initialization means erases the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means;
When the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is restored by the game information restoring means, the determination probability setting means cannot change the determination probability of the determination means,
When the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased and the determination probability of the determination means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is predetermined normal information. When there is
The game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased, and the game is started with the judgment probability of the judging means based on the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means. be.

According to such a game machine, a plurality of determination probabilities are provided as the determination probabilities of the determination means, a predetermined determination probability is selected from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, and the selected determination probabilities are determined by the determination means. can be set as the determination probability of set probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the selected (set) determination probability; game information storage means for storing game information including determination results by the determination means; a first memory holding means for holding the setting information, a second memory holding means for holding the setting information even after the power supply is stopped, a game information restoring means for restoring the game information held in memory, and a memory held by a predetermined input operation. and game information initialization means for erasing the game information.

Deletion of the game information stored and held by the game information initialization means is set as a condition for changing the setting of the judgment probability, and if the stored game information is not erased, the setting of the judgment probability cannot be changed. there is Further, when the stored game information is erased and the setting of the determination probability is not changed, if the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is normal (that is, if there is no abnormality), the game information is erased. The determination probability is set based on the setting information that is initialized and stored, and the game is started.

As a result, in order to change the current determination probability settings to other determination probabilities, it becomes necessary to initialize the game information. state can be set. This makes it possible to provide a fair game. In addition, when the game information is initialized, if no operation is performed to change the setting of the determination probability, and if there is no abnormality in the stored setting information, the determination probability is set based on the stored setting information. to start the game. This eliminates the need to set the determination probability again when initializing the game information, and enables efficient setting of the gaming machine.

The normal information is information indicating a plurality of determination probabilities stored in the determination probability storage means, and is information indicating determination probabilities that can be set by the determination probability setting means. For example, when any one of three types (plurality) of determination probabilities can be set, the three types of settings are set to setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3, respectively, and setting 1, setting 2, or setting 3 Information indicating is called normal information. Information that does not indicate setting 1, setting 2, or setting 3 is called abnormal information (abnormal information). In addition, first abnormality determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormality in the information stored in the set probability storage means when power supply is started, and game information stored in the game information storage means when power supply is started. and a second abnormality determination means for determining whether or not there is an abnormality. Also provided is a setting information recovery means for recovering setting information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power. and

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1,
When the gaming information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased and the determination probability of the judging means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is not predetermined normal information. The time is characterized by disabling the start of the game.

According to such a game machine, the game information stored and held is erased, but if the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is normal. on the condition that the determination probability is set based on the setting information, and the game is started. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means, it is impossible to start the game in the state of the abnormality. As a result, when there is an abnormality in the setting information, the game is surely disabled before the game is started without setting any determination probability, thereby preventing unexpected disadvantages to the game parlor and the players. can be prevented.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 or Reference Invention 12-2,
When the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased and the determination probability of the judging means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is not predetermined normal information. When, the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased, and the determination probability setting means sets the determination probability of the determination means, after which the game can be started. is.

According to such a game machine, the game information stored and held is erased, but if the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is normal. on the condition that the determination probability is set based on the setting information, and the game is started. On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means, the game cannot be started in the state of the abnormality, the game information is erased, and a determination is made with a predetermined input operation. A game can be started by setting the determination probability by the probability setting means. That is, when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means, the game can be started by erasing the game information and resetting the determination probability. Accordingly, when there is an abnormality in the setting information, it is necessary to set an arbitrary determination probability with a predetermined input operation before starting the game. This also prevents the setting of unexpected determination probabilities or the setting of abnormal determination probabilities, thereby preventing unforeseen disadvantages for game parlors and players. Become.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-2 or Reference Invention 12-3,
When the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased and the determination probability of the judging means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is not predetermined normal information. when,
The method is characterized in that a notification indicating that it is necessary to set the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means is provided on a predetermined display portion.

According to such a gaming machine, when the stored game information is erased but the determination probability setting is not changed (setting operation), if there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means performs a notification on a predetermined display unit indicating that a predetermined input operation is required to set a predetermined determination probability by the determination probability setting means. Thus, even when the setting information is abnormal and the game becomes unplayable (the game does not start), the means for canceling the unplayable state (for making the game available) can be easily and clearly grasped. becomes possible.

According to the gaming machine of the present reference invention, it is possible to provide a fair and efficient gaming machine by providing a predetermined limit to the setting conditions of the determination probability setting function.

(Reference invention 13)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 is
determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
special game execution means for performing a special game advantageous to the player by stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a plurality of determination probabilities as determination probabilities that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
determination probability setting means capable of setting the predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as the determination probability of the determination means;
a power supply means for supplying power;
game information storage means for storing game information including the result of determination by the determination means;
setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
a first storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a second storage holding means capable of storing and holding the setting information stored in the setting probability storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
game information recovery means capable of recovering game information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply;
A game in which the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means is erased when the power supply means starts supplying power by a predetermined input operation, and the game information when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected is not restored. and information initialization means,
making it possible to change the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means when the game information initialized by the game information initialization means erases the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means;
When the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is restored by the game information restoring means, the determination probability setting means cannot change the determination probability of the determination means,
When the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased and the determination probability of the determination means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is predetermined normal information. When there is, erase the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means, and start the game with the determination probability of the determination means based on the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means,
When there is an abnormality in the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means and when the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is predetermined normal information, the first memory holding means The game information stored and held by the means is erased, and the game can be started with the determination probability of the determination means based on the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means.

According to such a game machine, a plurality of determination probabilities are provided as the determination probabilities of the determination means, a predetermined determination probability is selected from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, and the selected determination probabilities are determined by the determination means. can be set as the determination probability of set probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the selected (set) determination probability; game information storage means for storing game information including determination results by the determination means; a first memory holding means for holding the setting information, a second memory holding means for holding the setting information even after the power supply is stopped, a game information restoring means for restoring the game information held in memory, and a memory held by a predetermined input operation. and game information initialization means for erasing the game information.

Deletion of the game information stored and held by the game information initialization means is set as a condition for changing the setting of the judgment probability, and if the stored game information is not erased, the setting of the judgment probability cannot be changed. there is Further, when the stored game information is erased and the setting of the determination probability is not changed, if the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is normal (that is, if there is no abnormality), the game information is erased. The determination probability is set based on the setting information that is initialized and stored, and the game is started. Further, even if the game information that is stored and held by the game information initialization means is not erased, if there is an abnormality in the stored game information and if the stored and held setting information is normal information, the game information is similarly deleted. A game can be started by setting the determination probability based on the setting information that is initialized and stored.

As a result, in order to change the current determination probability settings to other determination probabilities, it becomes necessary to initialize the game information. state can be set. This makes it possible to provide a fair game. In addition, when the game information is initialized, if no operation is performed to change the setting of the determination probability, and if there is no abnormality in the stored setting information, the determination probability is set based on the stored setting information. to start the game. Further, if there is an abnormality in the stored game information due to the occurrence of some abnormality, the game information is initialized even if the operation for erasing the game information is not performed by the game information initialization means. Furthermore, if the setting information at this time is normal information, the game can be started without changing the setting of the determination probability. In addition, this eliminates the need to set the determination probability again when initializing the game information, and enables efficient setting of the gaming machine.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1,
When the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is not the normal information, the start of the game is disabled. It is characterized.

According to such a game machine, the game information stored and held is erased, but if the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is normal. on the condition that the determination probability is set based on the setting information, and the game is started. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means and when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means, the game is started in the state of the abnormality. Impossible. As a result, when there is an abnormality in the setting information, the game is surely disabled before the game is started without setting any determination probability, thereby preventing unexpected disadvantages to the game parlor and the players. can be prevented.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 or Reference Invention 13-2,
When the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means is not the normal information, the first storage holding means stores and holds the setting information. The game information is erased, and the game can be started after setting the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means.

According to such a game machine, the game information stored and held is erased, but if the setting of the determination probability is not changed (setting operation), the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is normal. on the condition that the determination probability is set based on the setting information, and the game is started. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means and when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means, the game is started in the state of the abnormality. The game can be started by erasing the game information and setting the determination probability by the determination probability setting means with a predetermined input operation. That is, when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means, the game can be started by erasing the game information and resetting the determination probability. Accordingly, when there is an abnormality in the setting information, it is necessary to set an arbitrary determination probability with a predetermined input operation before starting the game. This also prevents the setting of unexpected determination probabilities or the setting of abnormal determination probabilities, thereby preventing unforeseen disadvantages for game parlors and players. Become.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-2 or Reference Invention 13-3,
When the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased and the determination probability of the judging means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is not predetermined normal information. when,
The method is characterized in that a notification indicating that it is necessary to set the determination probability of the determination means by the determination probability setting means is provided on a predetermined display portion.

According to such a gaming machine, when the stored game information is erased but the determination probability setting is not changed (setting operation), if there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means performs a notification on a predetermined display unit indicating that a predetermined input operation is required to set a predetermined determination probability by the determination probability setting means. Thus, even when the setting information is abnormal and the game becomes unplayable (the game does not start), the means for canceling the unplayable state (for making the game available) can be easily and clearly grasped. becomes possible.

1 pachinko game machine, 7b production pattern display area (production pattern display unit), 8 production pattern, 20 first start opening, 21 second start opening, 30 first big winning opening, 35 second big winning opening, 39 specific area , 41a first special symbol display (first special symbol display section), 41b second special symbol display (second special symbol display section), 80 main control board (main control section), 90 sub control board (sub control section), 100 image control board (image control section), 103a first effect suspension display, 103b second effect suspension display.

Claims (1)

determination means for determining based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
identification information display means for variably displaying identification information;
special game execution means for performing a special game advantageous to the player by stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner when the result of determination by the determination means is a specific result;
determination probability storage means for storing a determination probability that the determination means determines a specific result;
determination probability setting means for setting the determination probability in a state in which the determination probability can be set;
and a power supply means for supplying power,
a game state information storage means capable of storing game state information including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
storage holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information stored in the game state information storage means for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped, based on detection of a drop in the power supply voltage;
a game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts supplying power;
a game state information initialization means for erasing the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply, and not restoring the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; ,
a game profit giving means for giving a predetermined amount of game profit based on the establishment of a specific condition;
a game information display unit capable of displaying predetermined game information;
with
The determination probability setting means is
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, it is possible to set the determination probability,
When the game state information is restored by the game state information restoring means and the game is started, the determination probability is not settable,
The game information display unit
The first period displays information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means in a state in which the determination probability can be set, and the second period after the first period indicates the allocation ratio of the game profit in the specific period. display information
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images